Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
User’s Guide
3BSE 008 878R301
Use of DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE
This publication includes, DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE information where appropriate to point out safety
related or other important information.
DANGER Hazards which could result in severe personal injury or death
WARNING Hazards which could result in personal injury
CAUTION Hazards which could result in equipment or property damage
NOTE Alerts user to pertinent facts and conditions
Although DANGER and WARNING hazards are related to personal injury, and CAUTION hazards are associated with
equipment or property damage, it should be understood that operation of damaged equipment could, under certain operational
conditions, result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore, comply fully with all
DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION notices.
TRADEMARKS
Advant, AdvaCommand, and AdvaBuild are registered trademarks of ABB Asea Brown Boveri Ltd. Switzerland.
Advant Fieldbus and Advant Controller are trademarks of ABB Asea Brown Boveri Ltd. Switzerland.
ABB Master is a registered trademark of ABB Asea Brown Boveri Ltd. Switzerland.
ELCON is a trademark of ELCON Instruments SRL, Italy.
HART is a registered trademark of HART Communication Foundation of Austin, Texas, USA.
NOTICE
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB
Automation Products AB. ABB Automation Products AB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this
document.
In no event shall ABB Automation Products AB be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of
any nature or kind arising from the use of this document, nor shall ABB Automation Products AB be liable for incidental or
consequential damages arising from use of any software or hardware described in this document.
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without ABB Automation Products AB’s written permission,
and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor be used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance
with the terms of such license.
CE MARKING
The S800 I/O meets the requirements specified in the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and in Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC.
Template: 3BSE001286/E
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1 - Introduction
1.1 General Information................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Equipment Requirements......................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Manual Organization ............................................................................................... 1-4
1.4 Related Documentation............................................................................................ 1-5
1.5 Release History ........................................................................................................ 1-6
1.6 Terminology............................................................................................................. 1-7
1.7 Product Overview .................................................................................................... 1-8
1.7.1 I/O Station with S800 I/O ......................................................................1-11
1.7.1.1 CI810/CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface ....... 1-12
1.7.1.2 CI820 Fieldbus Communication Interface ..................... 1-14
1.7.1.3 CI830 Fieldbus Communication Interface ..................... 1-16
1.7.1.4 TB815 Interconnection Unit .......................................... 1-18
1.7.1.5 TB810/TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port ........................ 1-21
1.7.1.6 TB820 ModuleBus Modem ........................................... 1-22
1.7.1.7 Module Termination Units ............................................. 1-24
1.7.1.8 I/O Modules ................................................................... 1-32
1.7.2 Power Supply........................................................................................ 1-36
1.7.3 Examples of Enclosure Configurations ................................................ 1-39
1.7.4 Support for Intrinsic Safety System...................................................... 1-41
1.7.4.1 Support for HART.......................................................... 1-42
Chapter 2 - Installation
2.1 Site Planning Environment ...................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Site Selection and Preparation ................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 Environmental Considerations................................................................ 2-2
2.1.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility and CE marking.................................... 2-3
2.1.4 Layout of I/O Stations............................................................................. 2-3
2.1.4.1 I/O Station with S800 I/O ................................................ 2-3
2.1.5 Grounding ............................................................................................. 2-15
2.1.6 Signal Cable Considerations................................................................. 2-16
2.1.6.1 Recommendations for Signal and Process Cable........... 2-16
2.1.7 Power Requirements ............................................................................. 2-18
CONTENTS (continued)
2.1.8 Process Connection ............................................................................... 2-19
2.1.8.1 Analog Input Module AI810 Process Connections ........ 2-20
2.1.8.2 Differential Analog Input Module AI820 Process
Connections .................................................................... 2-24
2.1.8.3 RTD Input Module AI830 Process Connections ............ 2-26
2.1.8.4 TC/mV Input Module AI835 Process Connections ....... 2-28
2.1.8.5 Analog Output Module AO810 Process Connections.... 2-31
2.1.8.6 Bipolar Analog Output Module AO820
Process Connections....................................................... 2-34
2.1.8.7 Digital Input Module DI810 Process Connections......... 2-36
2.1.8.8 Digital Input Module DI811 Process Connections......... 2-39
2.1.8.9 Digital Input Module DI814 Process Connections......... 2-41
2.1.8.10 Digital Input Module DI820 Process Connections......... 2-44
2.1.8.11 Digital Input Module DI821 Process Connections......... 2-46
2.1.8.12 Digital Input Module DI830 Process Connections......... 2-48
2.1.8.13 Digital Input Module DI831 Process Connections......... 2-51
2.1.8.14 Digital Input Module DI885 Process Connections......... 2-54
2.1.8.15 Digital Output Module DO810 Process Connections .... 2-56
2.1.8.16 Digital Output Module DO814 Process Connections .... 2-59
2.1.8.17 Digital Output Module DO815 Process Connections .... 2-62
2.1.8.18 Digital Output Module DO820 Process Connections .... 2-64
2.1.8.19 Digital Output Module DO821 Process Connections .... 2-68
2.1.8.20 Pulse Counter Module DP820 Process Connection ....... 2-72
2.1.9 Hazardous Applications ........................................................................ 2-76
2.1.10 High Voltage Switch-gear Applications................................................ 2-76
2.1.11 Lightning Strike Protection ................................................................... 2-76
2.1.12 Mounting Dimensions........................................................................... 2-76
2.2 Setup....................................................................................................................... 2-78
2.2.1 Safety Regulations ................................................................................ 2-79
2.2.1.1 Personnel Safety ............................................................. 2-79
2.2.1.2 Equipment Safety ........................................................... 2-79
2.2.2 Grounding ............................................................................................. 2-79
2.2.3 Cable Routing in Enclosures................................................................. 2-81
2.2.4 Power Connection ................................................................................. 2-81
2.2.5 I/O Station with S800 I/O ..................................................................... 2-82
CONTENTS (continued)
2.2.6 Checklists.............................................................................................. 2-84
2.2.6.1 Grounding Philosophy, Ground Plane System .............. 2-84
2.2.6.2 Process Cabling, Shielding, Grounding, Max. Length .. 2-85
2.2.6.3 Power Supply ................................................................. 2-86
2.2.6.4 Lightning Protection ...................................................... 2-86
2.2.6.5 MTU, I/O Module .......................................................... 2-87
2.2.6.6 Cabinet, Internal Cables ................................................. 2-87
2.2.6.7 Communication, Communication Cables ...................... 2-88
2.2.6.8 Environmental Data ....................................................... 2-88
2.2.6.9 Airborne Contaminants .................................................. 2-89
2.2.6.10 Miscellaneous................................................................. 2-89
2.2.6.11 External Cables .............................................................. 2-89
2.2.7 Final Procedure Before Start-up ........................................................... 2-89
2.3 Shut-down Procedures ........................................................................................... 2-89
2.3.1 Safety Regulations ................................................................................ 2-90
2.3.2 I/O Station............................................................................................. 2-90
2.4 Start-up Procedures................................................................................................ 2-91
2.4.1 Safety Regulations ................................................................................ 2-91
2.4.2 Controller and I/O................................................................................. 2-91
2.4.2.1 Power Up on S800 I/O ................................................... 2-92
2.5 Product Verification ............................................................................................. 2-100
2.5.1 General................................................................................................ 2-100
2.5.1.1 Check of Process Input/Output Systems ...................... 2-100
2.5.2 Final Check ......................................................................................... 2-103
Chapter 3 - Configuration
3.1 Design Considerations ............................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 I/O Station Layout Hardware Configuration Guidelines........................ 3-1
3.1.2 CI810/CI810A/CI820/CI830 FCI ........................................................... 3-6
3.1.2.1 Address Switches ............................................................. 3-6
3.1.2.2 Advant Fieldbus 100 Connections ................................... 3-9
3.1.2.3 Advant Fieldbus 100 Twisted Pair Connection...............3-11
3.1.2.4 Profibus-DP Connections............................................... 3-14
3.1.2.5 Optical ModuleBus Connections ................................... 3-15
3.1.2.6 Power Supply Connections ............................................ 3-15
3.1.3 TB820 ModuleBus Modem .................................................................. 3-17
3.1.3.1 Cluster Address Switch .................................................. 3-18
3.1.3.2 Optical ModuleBus Connections ................................... 3-18
3.1.3.3 Power Supply Connections ............................................ 3-21
CONTENTS (continued)
3.1.4 SD811 and SD812 Power Supply Configurations ................................ 3-22
3.1.5 Module Termination Units (MTU)........................................................ 3-25
3.1.6 I/O Modules .......................................................................................... 3-26
3.1.7 Power Supply Load Calculation............................................................ 3-26
3.1.8 Heat Dissipation .................................................................................... 3-27
3.1.8.1 Cabinet Ventilation ......................................................... 3-27
3.1.8.2 Heat Dissipation Permitted in Cabinets.......................... 3-27
3.1.8.3 Calculation of Heat Generated in a Cabinet ................... 3-27
3.1.9 Maintenance and Repair........................................................................ 3-27
3.1.10 Expansion Considerations ..................................................................... 3-28
3.2 Capacity and Performance ..................................................................................... 3-28
3.2.1 Advant Fieldbus 100 Loading ............................................................... 3-28
3.2.1.1 Bus Load Calculation on 8,500 Meters .......................... 3-30
3.2.1.2 Bus Load Calculation on 15,000 Meters ........................ 3-31
3.2.2 Limitations caused by Profibus-DP ...................................................... 3-32
3.2.3 Data Scanning ....................................................................................... 3-33
3.2.4 Power Supply Requirements ................................................................. 3-35
3.2.5 Power and Cooling ................................................................................ 3-35
3.3 Application Start-up ............................................................................................... 3-36
CONTENTS (continued)
4.1.4 I/O Module Functionality on Profibus-DP ............................................. 4-9
4.1.4.1 Module Identity for Profibus-DP ..................................... 4-9
4.1.4.2 Module States for Profibus-DP ...................................... 4-10
4.1.4.3 Configuration, Parameters for Profibus-DP................... 4-12
4.1.4.4 OSP-Watchdog for Profibus-DP .................................... 4-13
4.1.4.5 Module Status for Profibus-DP...................................... 4-13
4.2 Operating Overview............................................................................................... 4-13
4.3 Runtime Tutorial.................................................................................................... 4-13
4.4 Operating Instructions............................................................................................ 4-13
4.5 Runtime Operations Menu..................................................................................... 4-13
Chapter 5 - Maintenance
5.1 Preventive Maintenance........................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Safety Regulations .................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.2 Visual Inspection..................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Hardware Indicators................................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.1 Color ....................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 Location .................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.3 Identification........................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.4 CI810/CI810A FCI Module LEDs ......................................................... 5-3
5.2.5 CI820 FCI Module LEDs ....................................................................... 5-5
5.2.6 CI830 FCI Module LEDs ....................................................................... 5-7
5.2.7 TB820 ModuleBus Modem LEDs.......................................................... 5-9
5.2.8 I/O Module LEDs ................................................................................. 5-10
5.3 Fault Finding and User Repair............................................................................... 5-12
5.3.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-12
5.3.2 Diagnostics and Fault Indications......................................................... 5-13
5.3.3 List of General Fault Finding Procedures and Hints ............................ 5-13
5.3.3.1 Location of Malfunction ................................................ 5-13
5.3.3.2 External Factors ............................................................. 5-14
5.3.3.3 Safety at Start/Stop......................................................... 5-14
5.3.3.4 Check of Power Supply.................................................. 5-14
5.3.4 User Repair ........................................................................................... 5-15
5.3.4.1 I/O Module Replacement ............................................... 5-15
5.3.4.2 Power Supply Module Replacement.............................. 5-18
5.3.4.3 Communication Module Replacement........................... 5-19
5.3.4.4 Application Memory Reset ............................................ 5-23
CONTENTS (continued)
5.3.5 Field Upgrade of CI810/CI810A/CI820/CI830 Basic Software ........... 5-23
5.3.5.1 Load the CI810/CI810A Software Upgrade................... 5-24
5.3.5.2 Load the CI820 Software Upgrade................................. 5-26
5.3.5.3 Load the CI830 Software Upgrade................................. 5-28
CONTENTS (continued)
A.34 TU812 Compact MTU.........................................................................................A-163
A.35 TU814 Compact MTU.........................................................................................A-167
A.36 TU830 Extended MTU .......................................................................................A-171
A.37 TU831 Extended MTU ........................................................................................A-175
A.38 TU835 Extended MTU ........................................................................................A-179
A.39 TU836 Extended MTU ........................................................................................A-183
A.40 TU837 Extended MTU ........................................................................................A-187
Chapter 1 Introduction
Advant Controller
Dual AF 100
I/O Station with Redundant FCIs I/O Station with S800 I/O
FCI
FCI
Stand-alone AC 70
Tool Tool
Advant Controller
FCI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
This book provides a physical and functional description of the S800 I/O. It provides
instructions for site planning and installation, start-up and shutdown procedures, and
information regarding capacity and performance. This book is not intended to be the sole source
of instruction for the S800 I/O system. Those people involved in system engineering should
attend the applicable system engineering or maintenance courses offered by ABB Automation
University.
Chapter
Runtime
Introduction Installation Configuration Maintenance Appendices Index
Operation
Introduction
Chapter 1 (this chapter) provides introductory and background information.This information
includes:
• Guidelines how you can find information in the manual.
• The relation to other documents related to the operation of the S800 I/O.
• A product and functional overview that give you an idea of what the S800 I/O can do and
how it works.
Installation
Chapter 2 guides in different installation activities:
• Site Planning Environment, guidelines for planning installation of the product.
• Setup gives you information how to set up the equipment. It includes safety regulations,
handling and unpacking instructions, inspection and assembly procedures, cable routing
and connections, setup procedures, etc. Common instructions as well as instructions
directed to specific subsystem are given. Activities prior to power up are described.
• Shut-down Procedures. In addition to safety regulations, the basic shut down procedures
are given. You should know how to shut-down the product if initial power up has prob-
lems.
• Start-up procedures. In the set-up section the conditions and the preparation for start are
discussed, and here you can find basic power up procedures, such as, how to apply power
to and initialize the I/O system.
• Product Verification. Initial determination that the I/O is functional.
Configuration
Chapter 3 will give you the information needed to obtain the desired function. The main
information is structured as follow:
• Design considerations and guidelines are given.
• Capacity and performance.
Operation
Chapter 4 discusses the different start modes and operating modes of the I/O.
Maintenance
Chapter 5 focus is on fault finding supported by built in diagnostics and use of system status
displays in operator station and LEDs on I/O hardware units.
Appendix
Appendix A contains different information which does not fit elsewhere in this manual
structure. Examples are:
• Technical data including cabinetry, power and cooling information
Index
It will offer you an easy way of finding information.
• The Advant Controller 410 User’s Guide gives information about the operation of that
controller system.
• AMPL Configuration AC 400 Series Reference Manual contains instructions for
configuration, application programming, fault finding and maintenance
• PC Elements AC 400 Series Reference Manual contains data for the available PC
elements.
• Data Base Elements AC 400 Series Reference Manual contains data for the available Data
Base elements.
• Function Chart Editor User’s Guide contains a description of the function chart editor
operation. The Function Chart Editor is the predecessor of the Function Chart Builder
(FCB).
• Function Chart Builder User’s Guide provides information for programming Advant
Controller 400 Series, MasterPiece 200/1, and Advant Controller 100 Series nodes. The
Function Chart Builder (FCB) is the successor of Function Chart Editor (FCE).
• Source Code Handling User’s Guide provides information on how to design the source
code.
• Interference-free Electronics describes the rule for the installation of equipment to ensure
the correct operation of equipment in environments where disturbance are present.
• ABB Master Environmental Immunity manual contains a philosophy, theory, design and
application of EMC on equipment and systems. This manual is valid of all ABB control
systems and contains a summary of the ABB Master environmental factors.
• Advant Fieldbus 100 User’s Guide describes the equipment and contains information
required to install and commission the system.
• Profibus-DP Advant Controller 400 Series User’s Guide describes the equipment and
contains information required to install and commission the system.
1.6 Terminology
The following terms and definitions are used as part of the S800 I/O:
Term Definition
AC 400 Advant Controller 410 and Advant Controller 450
AF 100 Advant Fieldbus 100 is the communications bus between the I/O
stations and the Advant Controllers. (FCI to CI52x)
AMPL An acronym for ABB Master Programing Language.
FCI The Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) device contains the
interface to the fieldbus (e.g. AF 100), ModuleBus interface and
power regulators. The FCI module can manage 24 I/O devices (up to
12 directly and to the others in 1 to 7 I/O clusters).
Term Definition
I/O cluster An extension of the I/O Station’s ModuleBus connected to the FCI by
fiber optic connections. Up to 12 I/O devices per cluster.
I/O device A complete I/O device consists of one MTU and one I/O module.
I/O module Is the active, electronic and signal conditioning part of an I/O device.
I/O station An I/O station consists of one or two FCI(s), 1-7 I/O clusters and up to
24 I/O devices.
ModuleBus Is an incremental, electrical or optical, bus for interconnection of I/O
devices.
(ModuleBus) Is used when extending the electrical ModuleBus (within the max.
Extension cable 2 meters).
MTU The Module Termination Unit is a passive base unit containing
process terminals and a part of the ModuleBus.
OSP Outputs Set as Predetermined. A user configurable action on an
output module when communications is lost to the FCI or Controller
Profibus-DP Profibus-DP is one of the communication buses between the I/O
stations and the Advant Controllers. (FCI to CI541.)
SOE Sequence of events. Time stamping of status changes for digital
inputs.
Device Type
Function
Designator
AI810 8 AI channels (1*8), 0...20mA, 0...10V
AI820 4 AI channels (differential), -20...+20mA, -10...+10V, -5...+5V
AI830 8 AI channel for Resistance Measurements (e.g. Pt 100 sensors)
AI835 7+1 AI channels for Thermocouples or mV Inputs
Device Type
Function
Designator
AO810 8 AO channels (1*8), 0...20mA
AO820 4 AO channels (bipolar), -20...+20mA, -10...+10V
CI810/CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) to S800 I/O.
CI820 Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) for redundant
communications to S800 I/O Stations
CI830 Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI) with Profibus-DP to
S800 I/O
DI810 16 DI channels (2x8), 24V d.c.
DI811 16 DI channels (2x8), 48V d.c.
DI814 16 DI channels (2x8), 24V d.c. current source
DI820 8 DI channels (8x1), 120V a.c./d.c.
DI821 8 DI channels, (8x1) 230V a.c./d.c.
DI830 16 DI channels (2x8) 24V d.c. with sequence of event (SOE)
handling.
DI831 16 DI channels (2x8) 48V d.c. with sequence of event (SOE)
handling.
DI885 8 DI channels, (1x8) 24/48V d.c. with sequence of event (SOE)
handling.
DO810 16 DO channels (2x8), 24Vd.c.,0.5A, current sourcing
DO814 16 DO channels (2x8), 24Vd.c.,0.5A current sinking
DO815 8 DO channels (2x4), 24V d.c., 2A, current sourcing
DO820 8 DO channels (1x8), Relay, 250V 3A a.c. (45W d.c.) (NO)
DO821 8 DO channels (1x8), Relay, 250V 3A a.c. (45W d.c.) (NC)
DP820 2 channels, pulse count and frequency measurement
TB805 Cable adaptor out module (electrical ModuleBus)
TB806 Cable adaptor in module (electrical ModuleBus)
TB807 Terminator module for electrical ModuleBus
TB810 ModuleBus Optical Port Module 10 Mbit driver, fiber optic
connection on the CI810 for S800 I/O (TB820) and drive
equipment.
Device Type
Function
Designator
TB811 ModuleBus Optical Port Module 5 Mbit driver, fiber optic
connection on the CI810 or TB815 for drive equipment
TB815 ModuleBus Interconnection Unit to redundant FCIs (CI820)
TB820 ModuleBus Modem, fiber optic ModuleBus interface of an I/O
cluster. 10 Mbit driver.
TC501V150 Cable terminator for AF 100 twisted pairs, 150 ohms
TC505 Connector: AF 100 Trunk Tap to FCI
TK801V003 Cable, ModuleBus Extension, 300 mm (11.8 inches)
TK801V006 Cable, ModuleBus Extension, 600 mm (23.6 inches)
TK801V012 Cable, ModuleBus Extension, 1.2 meters (47.25 inches)
TK811V015 Cable, Optical ModuleBus Extension, 1.5 meters (59 inches)
TK811V050 Cable, Optical ModuleBus Extension, 5 meters (16 feet)
TK811V150 Cable, Optical ModuleBus Extension, 15 meters (50 feet)
TU810 Compact MTU, 3*8 + 2*3 terminals, 50V
TU811 Compact MTU, 2*8 terminals, 250V
TU812 Compact MTU, 25 pin D-sub Connector for field connection, 50V
TU814 Compact MTU, Crimp Snap-in Connector for field connection,
50V
TU830 Extended MTU, 3*16 + 2*4 terminals, 50V
TU831 Extended MTU, 8*2 terminals, 250V
TU835 Extended MTU, 4*2 groups + 2*4 power terminals, 50V,
individually fused per channel
TU836 Extended MTU, 2*4 groups + 2*6 power terminals, 250V,
individually fused per channel
TU837 Extended MTU, 2*4 groups + 2*6 power return terminals, 250V
SD811 Power supply, 120/230V a.c. to 24V d.c. @ 2.5A
SD812 Power supply, 120/230V a.c. to 24V d.c. @ 5.0A
RE810 Wall Cabinet, IP65, 800 x 1000 x 300 mm (31.5 x 39.4 x 11.8)
ModuleBus
Each I/O module is installed on a Module Termination Unit (MTU). The first MTU with its I/O
module connects to the FCI or a cluster’s ModuleBus Modem and then each of the remaining
MTUs connect to the previous MTU. With redundant FCIs, the ModuleBus connects to the
ModuleBus Interconnection Unit.
An FCI communicates with its I/O modules over the ModuleBus. The ModuleBus can be
divided into 8 clusters, one base cluster and up to 7 I/O cluster. The base cluster consists of the
FCI and I/O modules. Additional I/O clusters (1 to 7) consist of a ModuleBus Modem and I/O
modules. The ModuleBus Modems are connected via optical cables to an optional ModuleBus
Optical Port module on the FCI.
Within a cluster the ModuleBus is made up of increments that are integrated into each MTU.
The FCI and ModuleBus Modems have a ModuleBus outlet connector to connect to an MTU.
An MTU has a bus inlet and a bus outlet connector. By adding, on the DIN rail, an MTU to a
FCI or a ModuleBus Modem, the bus is automatically expanded up to a maximum of 12 MTUs.
Unique position codes are automatically assigned to each MTU as the bus is expanded. An
inserted I/O module is assigned the unique position identity of its MTU. Through the
incremental bus design the physical size of an S800 I/O installation is directly proportional to
the number of installed MTUs.
The S800 I/O modules can be inserted and removed from MTUs without disturbing system
operation. The physical lock, which locks an I/O module to its MTU, allows I/O module
removal only when the lock is in its unlock position. The locking mechanism also acts as a logic
lock so that an I/O module is only operational when the lock is in the locked position. If the lock
is in its unlocked position, output channels are de-energized and I/O modules can be
inserted/removed without need to remove system or field power.
The MTUs are totally passive units with all active circuitry allocated to the I/O module. The
ModuleBus requires a terminator to be installed after the last MTU of an I/O cluster.
Figure 1-5. Typical I/O Station Base Cluster with S800 I/O
Figure 1-6. Typical I/O Station Base Cluster with Redundant FCIs to S800 I/O
I/O Station modules are mounted on DIN rails and are connected by the ModuleBus. This
principle allows horizontal and vertical mounting on the wall. Figure 1-7 shows the FCI
Module.
LED Status
Fuse Cover F R Indicators
P
T1 T2
ModuleBus
DIN Rail Interface
Connector
SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 56 Address
3 7 x 10
2 8 Switch #1
109 (Address 04
5
4 6 shown)
3 7x1 Address
1)
CI810
2
109
8 Switch #2
Service Port
Label SWX.X/Y
AF100 Tx Rx
software L+ L+ SA 1 2
Connector for the TB810/TB811
version L- L- SB Optical ModuleBus Port
+ + Tx Interface
Power Supply - -
Connections SH SH
SH SH Rx
AF 100 Channel 2
Connector
Redundant Power
Supervision AF 100 Channel 1 1) or CI810A
Connector
The FCI communicates with the Advant Controller, ModuleBus Modems and the I/O modules.
The FCI handles the I/O-modules operations such as read and write data, read status and
configuration of modules and channels. The FCI has a connector for the TB810/TB811 Optical
ModuleBus Port.
The FCI provides 24V d.c. (from the source) and an isolated 5V d.c. power to the base cluster’s
I/O modules (12 maximum) by way of the ModuleBus connections. One power source (single
or redundant 24V d.c.) can be connected to the power terminals (L+ & L-) of the FCI. A
replaceable fuse for the 24V supply to the I/O modules is located under the fuse cover.
1:1 redundant power sources can be supervised by connecting the power sources POWER OK
status signals to terminals SA and SB.
The size, type and direction of data to be transferred on the AF 100 bus depends on and is
determined by the I/O module type. The FCI can be configured to send or transmit dynamic data
over the AF 100 with cycle times in the interval of 1 to 4096 ms.
F R
P
162 mm (6.37”) T1 T2
SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 5 6
3 7
x 10
2 8
1 0 9
4 5 6
3 7
x1
2 8
1 9
CI810 0
AF 100
L+ L+ SA 1 2
- -
L L SB
+ + Tx
- -
SH SH
Rx
SH SH
I/O Station modules are mounted on DIN rails and are connected by the ModuleBus through the
TB815 Interconnection Unit to the CI820 FCI. Figure 1-9 shows the CI820 FCI Module.
STN. ADDR.
4 56 Address
3 7 x 10
2 8 Switch #1
109 (Address 04
4 56 shown)
3 7 x1 Address
CI820
2
109
8 Switch #2
The FCI communicates with the Advant Controller, and the I/O modules. The FCI handles the
I/O module operations such as read and write data, read status and configuration of modules and
channels. The CI820 FCI has an electrical ModuleBus connector that plugs into the TB815
Interconnection Unit. The TB815 provides an electrical ModuleBus connection (via a
TK801Vxx extension cable) to the TB806 Cable Adaptor In Module at the I/O modules, and to
the TB810/TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port. See Figure 1-15 for the layout of the redundant FCI
with the TB815.
The FCI provides 24V d.c. (from the source) and an isolated 5V d.c. power to the base cluster’s
I/O modules (12 maximum) by way of the electrical ModuleBus connections. One power source
(single or redundant 24 V d.c.) can be connected to the power terminals (L+ & L-) of the FCI.
1:1 redundant power sources can be supervised by connecting the power sources POWER OK
status signals to terminals SA and SB.
The size, type and direction of data to be transferred on the AF 100 bus depends on and is
determined by the I/O module type. The FCI can be configured to send or transmit dynamic data
over the AF 100 with cycle times in the interval of 1 to 4096 ms.
F R
P
T1 T2
PR DU
162 mm (6.37”)
STN. ADDR.
4 5 6
3 7
x 10
2 8
1 0 9
4 5 6
3 7
x1
2 8
CI820 1 09
AF100
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB
+
-
SH
SH
I/O Station modules are mounted on DIN rails and are connected by the ModuleBus. This
principle allows horizontal and vertical mounting on the wall. Figure 1-11 shows the FCI
Module.
LED Status
F R Indicators
P
RX TX
PROFIBUS ModuleBus
DIN Rail Interface
Connector
SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 56 Address
3 7 x 10
2 8 Switch #1
109 (Address 04
4 56
3 7 x1 Address shown)
CI830
2
109
8 Switch #2
Service Port
Label SWX.X/Y
PROFIBUS Tx Rx
software Connector for the TB810/TB811
version L+ Optical ModuleBus Port
L- Tx Interface
Power Supply SA
Connections
SB Rx
Profibus-DP
Connector
The FCI communicates with the Advant Controller, ModuleBus Modems and the I/O modules.
The FCI handles the I/O-modules operations such as read and write data, read status and
configuration of modules and channels. The FCI has a connector for the TB810/TB811 Optical
ModuleBus Port.
The FCI provides 24 V d.c. (from the source) and an isolated 5 V dc power to the base cluster’s
I/O modules (12 maximum) by way of the ModuleBus connections. One power source (single
or redundant 24 V d.c.) can be connected to the power terminals (L+ & L-) of the FCI.
1:1 redundant power sources can be supervised by connecting the power sources POWER OK
status signals to terminals SA and SB.
The size, type and direction of data to be transferred on the Profibus-DP bus depends on and is
determined by the I/O module type. The FCI can be configured to send or transmit dynamic data
over the Profibus-DP with cycle times in the interval from 1 ms.
F R
P
RX TX
PROFIBUS
170 mm (6.7”)
SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 5 6
3 7
x 10
2 8
1 0 9
4 5 6
3 7
x1
2 8
1 9
CI830 0
PROFIBUS
L+
Tx
L-
SA
SB Rx
SERVICE SERVICE
Electrical ModuleBus
Extension Connector
TB815
Tx
Rx
Optional
TB810/TB811 Fiber
Optic Module Bus
Extension(s)
58 mm (3.3”) 38 mm (1.5”)
MODULEBUS
SERVICE SERVICE
162 mm (6.37”)
TB815
Tx
Rx
Figure 1-15 shows the TB815 configured with two CI820 FCIs for redundant operation.
F R F R
P M P
O
T1 T2 D T1 T2
U
PR DU L PR DU
E
B
U
S
SERVICE SERVICE
SWX.X/Y SWX.X/Y
L+ L+ SA AF100 L+ L+ SA AF100
L- L- SB L- L- SB
+ Tx +
- -
SH SH
SH Rx SH
Figure 1-15. Redundant CI820 FCIs and TB815 Interconnection Unit Layout
SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7 x 10
2 8
109
5 6
3
4
7x1
LED Status
CI810
2 8 Indicators
109
SWX.X/Y
AF100 Tx Rx TB810/TB811
L+ L+ SA 1 2 Optical ModuleBus Port
L- L- SB
+ + Tx
- -
SH SH
SH SH Rx
The TB820 ModuleBus Modem has a rotary switch that selects its cluster number, 1 to 7, on the
optical ModuleBus. Figure 1-17 shows the layout of the TB820 ModuleBus Modem.
LED Status
F R Indicators
P
ORx1 ORx2
ERx
Electrical ModuleBus
DIN Rail Interface Connector
CLUSTER
4 56
3 7 Cluster Address
2 Switch
1
(Address 4 shown)
TB820
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB
X4 X5
Rx Rx
Power Supply Tx Tx
Connections Optical ModuleBus
Interface Connector
Redundant Power
Supervision
The ModuleBus Modem communicates with the CI810 FCI via a TB810, or theTB815
Interconnection Unit via a TB810, and to the I/O modules. The FCI handles the I/O-modules
operations such as read and write data, read status and configuration of modules and channels.
The TB820 ModuleBus Modem provides 24V d.c. (from the source) and an isolated, short
circuit proof 5 V dc power to the cluster’s I/O modules by way of the electrical ModuleBus
connection. One power source (single or redundant 24V d.c.) can be connected to the power
terminals (L+ & L-).
F R
P
ORx1 ORx2
ERx
162 mm (6.37”)
CLUSTER
4 5 6
3 7
2
1
TB820
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB
Two mechanical keys are used to set-up each MTU for a particular group or type of I/O module.
The mechanical keys protect the I/O modules from being inserted on the wrong MTU and
thereby being damaged by excessive voltage or current. There are 36 different configurations
that can be set to match an I/O module type. There is also a mechanical locking tab that locks
the I/O module into position on the MTU. This module lock is connected to a switch that keeps
the I/O module in its initialization state until it is locked into position.
The MTUs are available in two versions (Compact and Extended). The Compact MTU version
typically provides for a compact installation of the I/O modules using 1 wire connections. The
Extended MTU version provides for a more complete installation on the MTU, including 3 wire
connection, fuses and field circuit power distribution. See Figure 1-19 and Figure 1-20 for an
illustration of the MTUs together with the I/O modules.
122 mm
7 mm
(4.8”)
(.27”)
F
R
W
50 mm
(1.97”)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
162 mm
119 mm
(6.37”)
(4.68”)
9
E
F
10 D
A
11
C
B
12
13
E
F
D
14 A
C
15
B
16
DI810
24V
31.5 mm (1.24")
7 mm 58.5 mm
(.27”) (2.3”)
TU812 Compact MTU for 50 Volt Applications and 25 pin D-sub for Process
Connections
The TU812 is a compact module termination unit. It provides 16 signal terminations and two
process voltage connections to the I/O module and connection to the ModuleBus of the
communication interface (FCI or ModuleBus Modem). The TU812 has a 25 pin D-Sub
connector for signals and process power connections. The TU812 distributes the ModuleBus to
the I/O module and to the next MTU. The correct ModuleBus address of this MTU is
automatically configured when inserted into the previous MTU.
See Table 3-8 for information about the combination between MTU and I/O modules.
7 mm (.27”) 122 mm
(4.8”)
A
F F
B B
E E
C C
(1.77”)
45 mm
D
DI810
24V
109 mm
(4.3”)
10
12
13
14
15
16
11
W
R
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
31.5 mm (1.24")
120.5 mm
7 mm (4.74”)
(.27”)
TU835 Extended MTU, Individually Fused per Channel for 50 Volt Applications
The TU835 is an 8 channel extended module termination unit. It provides field terminations to
the I/O module and connection to the ModuleBus of the communication interface (FCI or
ModuleBus Modem). The TU835 has two rows of terminals for process power connection and a
single row of process signal connections. Each channel has one fused (3A max.) transmitter
power terminal and one signal connection. Process voltage can be connected to 2 individually
isolated groups. The TU835 distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU.
The correct ModuleBus address of this MTU is automatically configured when inserted into the
previous MTU.
See Table 3-8 for information about the combination between MTU and I/O modules.
TU836 Extended MTU, Individually Fused per Channel for 250 Volt Applications
The TU836 is an 8 channel extended module termination unit. It provides field terminations to
the I/O module and connection to the ModuleBus of the communication interface (FCI or
ModuleBus Modem). The TU836 has two rows of terminals for field signals and process power
connection. Each channel has one fused (3A max.) power outlet terminal and one signal return
connection. Process voltage can be connected to 2 individually isolated groups. The TU836
distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. The correct ModuleBus
address of this MTU is automatically configured when inserted into the previous MTU.
See Table 3-8 for information about the combination between MTU and I/O modules.
NOTE
The standard fuse holder that comes with the TU836 can be changed to an
indicating fuse holder. This indicating fuse holder can be ordered from Phoenix:
TU837 Extended MTU, Individually Fused per Channel for 250 Volt Applications
The TU837 is an 8 channel extended module termination unit. It provides field terminations to
the I/O module and connection to the ModuleBus of the communication interface (FCI or
ModuleBus Modem). The TU837 has two rows of terminals for field signals and process power
connection. Each channel has one fused (3A max.) power outlet terminal and one process power
connection. Process voltage return can be connected to 2 individually isolated groups. The
TU837 distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. The correct
ModuleBus address of this MTU is automatically configured when inserted into the previous
MTU.
See Table 3-8 for information about the combination between MTU and I/O modules.
Mounting
The I/O station can be mounted horizontally and/or vertically or in combinations; for examples
of configurations see Figure 1-22 through Figure 1-26. Different MTUs (Compact or Extended
version) can be used depending on available space and preferred way of installing the field
wiring (external marshalling/power distribution or direct on Extended MTUs using built in 2/3
wire termination and power distribution arrangements). Compact and extended MTUs can be
mixed on the same ModuleBus and mounting rail.
816 mm (32.1")
20
(0.8)
10
(0.4)
84 58.5
(3.3) (2.3)
1560 mm (61.4")
20
10 84 120.5 (0.8)
(0.4) (3.3) (4.74)
1188 mm (46.77")
10 84 58.5 120.5 20
(0.4) (3.3) (2.3) (4.74) (0.8)
Figure 1-24. Combination Mounting of S800 I/O MTUs (Compact and Extended)
CI810 FCI
10 10
(0.4) (0.4)
84 84
(3.3) (3.3)
58.5
120.5 (2.3)
(4.74)
816 mm
(32.1)
1560 mm
(61.4")
20
(0.8)
20
(0.8)
Figure 1-26. Vertical Mounting of S800 I/O MTUs, Compact and Extended
SD811
L1
L2 (N)
PE
102 mm (4”)
a.c. 110-240V
104VA
DCOK
DC Adj.
+24V
2.5A
0V
DCOK
138 mm (5.4”)
125 mm (5”)
SD812
L1
L2 (N)
PE
134 mm (5.25”)
102 mm (4”)
a.c. 110-240V
207VA
DCOK
DC Adj.
+24V
5A
0V
DCOK
The S800 I/O station can be powered by a single or redundant supply voltage of 24V d.c., see
Figure 1-28, Figure 1-29 and Figure 1-30. Two power supplies with 120/230V inputs and
24V d.c. outputs are available to supply the I/O station and its field circuits. The SD811 Power
Supply provides 2.5A at 24V d.c. and the SD812 Power Supply provides 5A at 24V d.c. See
Section 3.1.2.6, Power Supply Connections for details.
Power
Supply 24V
A
B
FCI I/O station
24V power supply
or ModuleBus Modem
I/O modules
The FCI and ModuleBus Modem are able to supervise the redundant voltage supply. The
supervision function is individually configurable for power supervision of each I/O station.
FCI
or ModuleBus Modem
Power
Supply 24V
A
A
B
Power I/O station
Supply
B 24V d.c. power supply
Supervision 24V A, 24V B
I/O modules
SA
SB
SA
SB
L+
L+
L-
L-
Circuit
Breaker Fuse
SD811/812
or MCB
+24V
0V
PowOK Optional
Power to
field circuits
via MTUs
SD811/812
+24V
0V
PowOK
CI820
Diode
Voting
Unit
SA
SB
L+
L-
SD811/812
+24V
0V
PowOK
SD811/812
+24V
0V
PowOK
Figure 1-30. Connection Diagram for Redundant Power Supplies to Redundant FCIs
NOTE
Circuit breakers or a diode voting unit at the power supplies output are required if
hot replacement of supplies is required.
800 mm (31.5")
FCI
1000 mm (39.4")
POW POW
Figure 1-31. RE810 Cabinet with 12 I/O Modules and Redundant Station Power Supplies
800 mm (31.5")
FCI
Min
Min 100 mm (3,9”) Min
50 mm (2”) 50 mm (2”)
Min
8 mm (0,03”)
1000 mm (39.4")
Min
8 mm (0,03”) Min
100 mm (3,9”)
SD SD
811 811
I/O
Min 40 mm (1.6”)
Cable channel
I/O
Figure 1-32. Enclosure with 12 Modules and Redundant Station Power Supplies
S800 I/0
Figure 1-33. Example of Connection between S800 I/O and Intrinsic Safety System from
ELCON
To PC
S800 I/O
RS485
HART MultiplexerConnection
Figure 1-34. Example of Connection between S800 I/O and Intrinsic Safety System from
ELCON and HART Multiplexer Interface from HART
Chapter 2 Installation
This chapter contains guidelines for planning the installation of the S800 I/O equipment.
This chapter does not give the complete list of measures to be taken with respect to environment
and other conditions on site. The equipment should be adapted to the actual application by
thorough system definition and design.
Since each system is designed to meet a specific requirement, there is no standard configuration
that describes every system. Therefore, certain areas of the following instructions are meant
only as a guide for planning a specific installation. However, some of the information covers
specific requirements for proper system and equipment operation, and is not subject to
modification.
All information given in this chapter relates to standard equipment.
For installation of Advant Fieldbus 100 and Advant Fieldbus 100 modems, see the Advant
Fieldbus 100 User’s Guide.
For installation of Profibus-DP, see Profibus-DP Advant Controller 400 Series User’s Guide.
General
S800 I/O equipment can be installed in a designated control room, or located in the process area
when housed in a suitable enclosure. The S800 I/O is designed for a demanding industrial
environment.
Temperature
I/O Module Factors
The maximum ambient air temperature around S800 modules is 55°C (131°F) for I/O modules
mounted on Extended MTUs on vertical or horizontal orientated DIN-rails. I/O modules
mounted in Compact MTUs on a vertical DIN-rail allows operation at 40°C (104°F).
The ambient temperature derating which applies for vertical DIN-rail and Compact MTUs is
due to the reduced air flow through an I/O module due to the orientation.
The different hardware modules in the S800 I/O have different outputs of heat. Accurate
calculation of the heat produced by the system requires knowledge of the modules and the work
cycle. Power supplies with regulated outputs are highly recommended to minimize heat in
cabinets. Use of such devices will reduce the power loss of resistive loads and current outputs,
for example, digital inputs and analog outputs. Please refer to Section 3.2.5, Power and Cooling
for more information.
Cabinetry Factors
The temperature within cabinets and in the surrounding environment and atmosphere must be
considered, especially when using sealed cabinets (IP65/IP54) or tropicalized cabinets (IP41)
with considerable equipment and outside ambient temperatures at levels approaching 40°C
(104°F). The frequency of faults is estimated to double for each 20° C (36°F) increase in
temperature. Thus, it is important to maintain as low an ambient temperature outside the
cabinets (typical operating range 10 - 40°C (50 - 104°F)) as possible where the equipment is
installed. Design considerations are given in Section 3.1.8.2, Heat Dissipation Permitted in
Cabinets.
Vibration
The cabinets are to be located on a stable floor, wall, deck or supporting structure, free from
vibrations.
If the system equipment is installed in a control room adjacent to large machinery such as
shakers or large presses, where frequent major vibrations occur, shock absorbers or an isolation
pad may be required to protect the system equipment. Shock absorbers normally protect the
equipment from sustained low level vibrations (vibrations that are perceptible, but not
excessive). If vibrations or shock is a major problem, more extreme measures must be
considered to alleviate the problem.
A flat blade screw driver can be used to release the latch to allow easier movement along the
DIN-rail or removal of the unit (Figure 2-1).
ModuleBus
Release
I/O Module
DIN-rail Lock/Switch
To
Lock
E
F
D
A
Ground
C
B
Clip Spring
E
F
D
A
C
B
L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+
Pry down to
release rail
latch
Snapping the FCI, ModuleBus Modem or MTU to the DIN-rail makes contact by a grounding
spring with the chassis.
Connection of the MTU ModuleBus connector to the FCI, ModuleBus Modem or next MTU is
made by sliding the MTU along the mounting rail and then locking it in place (Figure 2-2).
F R
P
T1 T2
E
F
F
D D
A A
SERVICE
C
B
B
STN. ADDR.
4 56
E
F
F
3 7 x 10 D D
2 8 A A
109
C
C
B
B
5
4 6
3 7 x1
2 8
CI810 109
SWX.X/Y AF100 Tx Rx
L+ L+ SA 1 2
L- L- SB
+ + Tx L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+ L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+
- -
SH SH L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+ L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+
SH SH Rx
L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2- L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2-
The MTU can be disconnected from the FCI, ModuleBus Modem or another MTU by pressing
and holding the ModuleBus release button (Figure 2-3) while sliding the MTU away to the
right.
ModuleBus
Release
F R F R
P M P
O
T1 T2 D T1 T2
U
PR DU L PR DU
E
B
U
S
SERVICE SERVICE
SWX.X/Y SWX.X/Y
L+ L+ SA AF100 L+ L+ SA AF100
L- L- SB L- L- SB
+ Tx +
- -
SH SH
Rx
SH SH
Figure 2-4. Redundant CI820 FCIs and TB815 Interconnection Unit Layout
The redundant FCIs can either be mounted on a separate DIN rail or the same one as the I/O
modules. Room must be allowed to the left and right of the FCIs for disconnection from the
TB815 for removal (Figure 2-5).
The total length of the ModuleBus extension, from the TB815, and ModuleBus segments of the
I/O modules must not exceed 2.5 meters (8.2 feet).
Optical ModuleBus Extension can be connected to the TB815 via the TB810 ModuleBus
Optical Port unit for connection of 1 to 7 additional clusters.
F R F R
M F F F
P P
O
T1 T2 D T1 T2 R R R
U
PR DU L DU W W W
PR
E
B
U
1 1 1
S
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
SERVICE SERVICE 7 7 7
8 8 8
9 9 9
E
F
F
10 D 10 D 10 D
A A A
11 11 11
C
B
B
STN. ADDR STN. ADDR
4 5 6 4 5 6 12 12 12
3 7 3 7
E
13 13 13
F
2 8 x 10 2 8 x 10 D D D
1 0 9 1 0 9 14 A 14 A 14 A
C
4 5 4 5 6
B
6 15 15 15
3 7 3 7
x1 16 16 16
2 8 2 8 x1
CI820 1 0 9 TB815 CI820 1 0 9
DI810 DI810 DI810
24V 24V 24V
L+ L+ SA AF100 L+ L+ SA AF100
L- L- SB L- L- SB
+
-
Tx +
-
TB806 L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+ L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+ L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+
TK801V003
(300 mm)
(1 ft.)
ModuleBus length must not exceed 2.5 meters (8.2 feet) from FCI, TB815 Interconnection Unit,
or ModuleBus Modem to the last MTU including extension cables.
TB805
F TB806 F
R R
W W
1 Latch Release 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
E
E
F
F
10 D
A
10 D
A
11 11
C
C
B
B
12 12
13 13
E
E
F
F
14 14
D D
A A
15 15
C
C
B
B
16 16
DI810 DI810
24V 24V
Male Cable Female Cable
Connector Connector
TB810 has 10 Mbit drivers and is used with the TB820 (S800 I/O) and ABB drives equipment.
TB811 has 5Mbit drivers and is used with ABB variable drives ACS 600 equipment. The
TB811 can only use up to 10 meters (33 ft) plastic optic fiber. A Modulebus must have the same
type of drivers on each node.
SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7 x 10
2 8
109
5
4 6
3 7 x1
2 8
CI810 109
AF100
TB810
Tx Rx
L+ L+ SA 1 2
L- L- SB
+ + Tx
- -
SH SH
SH SH Rx
SERVICE SERVICE
L+ L+ SA AF100 L+ L+ SA AF100
L- L- SB L- L- SB
+ Tx +
- -
SH SH
Rx
SH SH
TB810
Each I/O cluster can have a maximum of 12 S800 I/O modules. The maximum number of
S800 I/O modules or other units connected to one FCI is 24. The optical ring connection allows
for a maximum distribution of 15m (49 ft.) (plastic fiber) or 200m (667 ft.) (HCS fiber) between
each I/O cluster on the ring, see example in Figure 2-9.
FCI FCI
The TB820 can be used in both a simplex optical configuration as well as in a duplex optical
configuration. In a simplex optical configuration, the optical ModuleBus nodes are connected in
a ring. In a duplex optical configuration, the optical ModuleBus nodes are connected in a row.
The optical ModuleBus Extension fiber optic (plastic fiber) cable comes in three standard
lengths:
• TK811V015 - 1.5 meters (5 ft.)
• TK811V050 - 5 meters (16 ft.)
• TK811V150 - 15 meters (49 ft.)
As with the FCI (base cluster), the electrical ModuleBus length must not exceed 2.5 meters
from the ModuleBus Modem to the last MTU of each cluster. Each cluster requires a TB807
ModuleBus Terminator plugged into the last MTU.
F
R
W I/O Module Lock/Switch
(shown locked)
1
2 I/O Module Lock/Switch
3 (shown unlocked)
4
5
6
7 Turn clockwise
8 to lock I/O Module
9
E
E
F
F
10 D
A
D
A
11
C
I/O Module
B
12
13 Key #1
E
E
F
14
D D
A A
15
C
C
B
16
I/O Module
DI810 Key #2
24V
Figure 2-10. MTU Mechanical Keys for I/O Module and Module Lock
CAUTION
Do not turn the I/O Module Lock/Switch counter-clockwise from the unlocked
position. This will cause it to break and will make the MTU and the I/O module
inoperative.
After all the MTUs are connected, the TB807 ModuleBus Terminator connects to the
ModuleBus connector of the last MTU of the I/O Station. The TB807 has a snap latch
(Figure 2-11) that holds it in place. To release the terminator, the latch has to be squeezed to
allow removal.
Top View
F
R
W
TB807
1
2
3
4 ModuleBus
5 Terminator
6 Latch
7
8
9 E
E
F
F
10 D
A
D
A
11
C
C
B
B
12
13
E
E
F
F
14
D D
A A
15
C
C
B
B
16
DI810
24V
The I/O Station configuration can be as shown in Figure 2-12 and/or as presented in Section
1.7.1.7, Module Termination Units and Section 1.7.3, Examples of Enclosure Configurations.
DIN-rail
mm 10 84 58.5 20
(inches) (0.4) (3.3) (2.3) (0.8)
Figure 2-12. I/O Station Layout with FCI and S800 I/O Modules
439 mm (17.2")
ModuleBus Modem TB820
Fiber Optic
ModuleBus Cables
10 58 58.5 20 mm
(0.4)(2.2) (2.3) (0.8) (inches)
Figure 2-13. I/O Station Layout with ModuleBus Modem and S800 I/O Modules
NOTE
In all installations, two end stops must be mounted on the DIN-rail, one at each
end of the station, to prevent the modules from moving along the rail, see
Figure 2-12.
Deviations from these installation rules are possible, but should be followed as much as
possible. The flexibility of the system allows both horizontal and vertical mounting of the rail
and mixing of MTU types as shown in Figure 2-14.
Figure 2-14. Compact and Extended MTU and Horizontal and Vertical Mounting.
2.1.5 Grounding
General
The signal processing electronics in the Advant System, and all interference suppression for
external signals, are normally directly grounded to chassis and/or plant ground. The plant
ground potential must be stable and well defined, even in the event of a low ground fault caused
by high voltage equipment or a lightning strike.
Each I/O module’s grounding spring which connects to the metallic DIN-rail which serves as
the module electronics ground conductor between the inter-connected devices. This is to ensure
a good ground connection both for the internal logic and for the EMI immunity and RF emission
of the modules. The DIN mounting rail must have a good bond to the PE of the cabinet.
If S800 I/O-modules are configured as two or more groups interconnected with an extension
cable(s), special care should be taken to ensure that the DIN-rails of all groups have a good
connection to ground. If the DIN-rails are mounted on a common metal sheet, no extra means
need be taken except to make sure that each rail has a reliable low ohmic path to the metal plate.
Ground connection can be done at a single point on the common metal plate.
The ground wire which joins the grounding systems should be ≥35 mm2 (2 AWG) copper (Cu),
Figure 2-15.
Cabinetry
or enclosure
Shield bar
Protective
Ground
Ground Plane
> 35 mm2
(> 2 AWG)
4. Use separate cables for analog, binary and heavy current lines. Lay the cables separately
sorted according to type. The signal cables and heavy current cables should be in separate
conduits or at least 30cm apart from each other.
5. The return-conductor should be in the same cable as the signal.
6. The field cables must be wired according to the recommendations of Figure 2-16.
7. Advant Fieldbus cable installed per the Advant Fieldbus 100 User’s Guide.
8. Profibus-DP cable installed per Profibus-DP Advant Controller 400 Series User’s Guide.
For modules with special LED indications see respectively modules in Appendix A, General
Specification.
I/O device
Distance 30 cm P
R
O
Own power supply cables
T
process I/O cables E
C
Field Cables for communication with Electronic
T
modems = long distance bus I
Zone (isolated) Zone
Video cables
O
Pulse transmission N
Distance 10 cm
B
A
Cables for communicating without
R
modems = short distance bus R
(RS232, RS422) I
E
R
Distance 30 cm
General
Power supplied to ABB system’s power supply units and for external supply to I/O can
normally be obtained from the plant a.c. or d.c. supply sources.
A.C. Supply
A power source can be rated as Class II or Class III with respect to level of disturbances, voltage
variations and so on, according to the IEC standards. Voltage range is 110 - 240V a.c. Class II
denotes a higher quality than Class III. The S800 I/O power supplies SD811 and SD812 are
rated for Class III mains.
D.C. Supply
Table 2-1. Requirements for D.C. Supply Sources
When using a d.c. source, only battery-supplied systems with a non-grounded battery can be
used for direct supply of ABB systems without galvanic isolation between the system and the
current source. With this type of supply, the battery is grounded in the ABB equipment.
Supply from a grounded battery requires an isolating d.c./d.c. converter.
Protective Ground
ABB cabinets supplied with 120/230V a.c. must always be provided with a protective ground.
Current Consumption
The total current consumption with 24V is calculated as follows:
6.3A
+24v L1+ L1+
Pwr. L1+
0v Fuse L-
Source L1-
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
C1 I1U
0 - 20mA Ch1 I C2 I1I
A1,A2 ZP
2 - Wire L1+
XMTRs L1+ B3,B4
C3 I2U
0 - 20mA Ch2 I C4 I2I
A3,A4 ZP
B5,B6 L1+ Mux.
0 - 10V Ch3 V C5 I3U
C6 I3I
ZP A5,A6 ZP
4 - Wire
XMTRs B7,B8 L1+
0 - 10V Ch4 V C7 I4U
C8 I4I
ZP A7,A8 ZP
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
C9 I5U
0 - 20mA Ch5 I C10 I5I
ZP A9,A10 ZP
L2+ B11,B12 L2+
C11 I6U
0 - 20mA Ch6 I C12 I6I
ZP A11,A12 ZP
3 - Wire
XMTRs L2+ B13,B14 L2+
0 - 10V Ch7 V C13 I7U
C14 I7I
A13,A14
ZP ZP
L2+ B15,B16 L2+
0 - 10V Ch8 V C15 I8U
C16 I8I
ZP A15,A16 ZP
6.3A
+24v L2+ L2+
L2+
Fuse
Chx V = Voltage Input 0v L2- L-
Chx I = Current Input L2- EM
Figure 2-18 shows the process connections for the AI810 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
L1+
C1 I1U
0 - 20mA Ch1 I B1 I1I
A1 ZP
L1+
C2 I2U
0 - 20mA Ch2 I B2 I2I
A2 ZP
L1+ Mux.
0 - 10V Ch3 V C3 I3U
B3 I3I
ZP A3 ZP
L1+
0 - 10V Ch4 V C4 I4U
B4 I4I
ZP A4 ZP
L2+
C5 I5U
0 - 20mA Ch5 I B5 I5I
ZP A5 ZP
L2+
C6 I6U
0 - 20mA Ch6 I B6 I6I
ZP A6 ZP
L2+
0 - 10V Ch7 V C7 I7U
B7 I7I
ZP A7 ZP
L2+
0 - 10V Ch8 V C8 I8U
B8 I8I
ZP A8 ZP
L2+ L2+
Pwr. 24V L2+
Chx V = Voltage Input Sup. 0V L2- ZP
EM
Chx I = Current Input
Figure 2-18. AI810 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
Figure 2-19 shows the process connections for the AI810 when installed on a TU835 Extended
MTU.
X12 F1
L1+ 11 L1+
I1U
0 - 20mA Ch1 I 12 I1I
ZP
F2
L1+ 13 L1+
I2U
0 - 20mA Ch2 I 14 I2I
ZP
F3
L1+ 15 L1+ Mux.
I3U
0 - 20mA Ch3 I 16 I3I
ZP
F4
L1+ 17 L1+
I4U
0 - 20mA Ch4 I 18 I4I
ZP
F5
L2+ 19 L2+
I5U
0 - 20mA Ch5 I 20 I5I
ZP
F6
L2+ 21 L2+
I6U
0 - 20mA Ch6 I 22 I6I
ZP
F7
L2+ 23 L2+
I7U
0 - 20mA Ch7 I 24 I7I
F8 ZP
L2+ 25 L2+
I8U
0 - 20mA Ch8 I 26 I8I
ZP
X13
+24v L2+ L2+
L2+
0v L2- L-
Chx I = Current Input L2- EM
Figure 2-20 shows the process connections for the AI810 when installed on a TU812 Compact
MTU.
TU812 AI810
1 1 UP1 +24V
L1+
14 14 UP1
L-
2 2 ZP1 0V
L1+
15 15 ZP1
I1U
I1I
3 3 S1 Ch1 V ZP
16 16 S2 Ch1 I L1+
I2U
4 4 S3 Ch2 V I2I
ZP
17 17 S4 Ch2 I
L1+ Mux.
5 5 S5 Ch3 V I3U
I3I
18 18 S6 Ch3 I ZP
Process 6 6 S7 Ch4 V L1+
Connection I4U
19 19 S8 Ch4 I I4I
ZP
7 7 S9 Ch5 V
L2+
20 20 S10 Ch5 I I5U
I5I
8 8 S11 Ch6 V ZP
21 21 S12 Ch6 I
L2+
I6U
9 9 S13 Ch7 V I6I
ZP
22 22 S14 Ch7 I
L2+
10 10 S15 Ch8 V I7U
I7I
23 23 S16 Ch8 I ZP
L2+
11 11 UP2 +24V I8U
24 24 UP2
I8I
ZP
12 12 ZP2 0V
L2+
25 25 ZP2
L-
13 13 EM EM EM
Please refer to Table A-2 for all AI810 process connections for each MTU type.
Pwr.
6.3A
Source +24v L1+ L1+
L1+
Fuse
0v L1- L1-
L1-
0 - 10V
B1,B2 L1+
Ch1 V C1 I1U+
C2 I1IB 250Ω Diff.
4 Wire A1,A2 L1- Compensation
Amp
250Ω
XTMR
4W
B3,B4 L1+ +
C3 I1I+
Ch1 - C4 I1- LPF
4 - 20mA A3,A4 L1-
250Ω
4W
B7,B8 L1+ +
Ch2 I C7 I2I+
C8 I2- LPF
A7,A8 L1-
Pwr.
Source B9,B10 L2+
C9 I3U+
Bridge C10 I3IB 250Ω Diff.
Jumper A9,A10 L2- Compensation
0 - 20mA Amp
250Ω
4W
B11,B12 L2+ +
Ch3 I C11 I3I+
C12 I3-
LPF
Ch3 -
A11,A12 L2-
4 Wire
XTMR B13,B14 L2+
CH4 V C13 I4U+
C14 I4IB
0 - 10V A13,A14 L2-
250Ω Diff.
Compensation Amp
L2+
250Ω
4W
B15,B16 L2+ +
3 Wire C15 I4I+
XTMR C16 I4- LPF
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3A
+24v L2+ L2+ LPF = Low Pass Filter
L2+
Fuse
Chx V = Voltage Input 0v L2- L2-
Chx I = Current Input L2- EM
Figure 2-22 shows the process connections for the AI820 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
250Ω
4W
XTMR L1+ +
C2 I1I+ LPF
Ch1 - B2 I1-
A2 L1-
4 - 20mA Bridge L1+
2 Wire Jumper C3 I2U+
XTMR B3 I2IB 250Ω Diff.
A3 L1- Compensation Amp
250Ω
4W
L1+ +
Ch2 I C4 I2I+ LPF
Ch2 - B4 I2-
Pwr. L1- A4 L1-
Source L2+
C5 I3U+
Bridge B5 I3IB Diff.
250Ω
Jumper A5 L2-
0 - 20mA Compensation Amp
250Ω
4W
L2+ +
Ch3 I C6 I3I+
B6
LPF
Ch3 - I3-
A6 L2-
4 Wire
XTMR L2+
CH4 V C7 I4U+
B7 I4IB 250Ω Diff.
0 - 10V A7 L2- Compensation Amp
250Ω
L2+
4W
+
3 Wire C8 I4I+
Ch4 - I4- LPF
XTMR B8
A8 L2-
Figure 2-22. AI820 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
Please refer to Table A-2 for all AI820 process connections for each MTU type.
6.3A
L1+
L1+
L1- Fuse ZP
0V L1-
T B1,B2
Ch1+ C1 I1+
Ch1- C2 I1-
ZP A1,A2 ZP
T B3,B4
Ch2+ C3 I2+
Ch2- C4 I2-
ZP A3,A4 ZP
T B5,B6
Ch3+ C5 I3+
Ch3- C6 I3-
ZP A5,A6 ZP
T B7,B8
Ch4+ C7 I4+
Ch4- C8 I4-
ZP A7,A8 ZP
B9,B10
T
Ch5+ C9 I5+
Ch5- C10 I5-
ZP A9,A10 ZP
T B11,B12
Ch6+ C11 I6+
Ch6- C12 I6-
ZP A11,A12 ZP
T B13,B14
Ch7+ C13 I7+
Ch7- C14 I7-
A13,A14 ZP
ZP
T B15,B16
Ch8+ C15 I8+
Ch8- C16 I8+
ZP A15,A16 ZP
6.3A
L2+
L2+
L2- Fuse ZP
0V L2- EM
Figure 2-24 shows the process connections for the AI830 when installed on a TU810 of TU814
Compact MTU.
L1+
L1+
0V L1- ZP
T
Ch1+ C1 I1+
Ch1- B1 I1-
ZP A1 ZP
T
Ch2+ C2 I2+
Ch2- B2 I2-
ZP A2 ZP
T
Ch3+ C3 I3+
Ch3- B3 I3-
ZP A3 ZP
T
Ch4+ C4 I4+
Ch4- B4 I4-
ZP A4 ZP
T
Ch5+ C5 I5+
Ch5- B5 I5-
ZP A5 ZP
T
Ch6+ C6 I6+
Ch6- B6 I6-
ZP A6 ZP
T
Ch7+ C7 I7+
Ch7- B7 I7-
ZP A7 ZP
T
Ch8+ C8 I8+
Ch8- B8 I8+
ZP A8 ZP
L2+
L2+
0V L2- ZP
EM
Figure 2-24. AI830 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
Please refer to Table A-7 for all AI830 process connections for each MTU type.
6.3A
L1+ PCJC-
L1+
L1- Fuse
L1-
B1,B2
Ch1+ C1 I1+
Ch1- C2 I1-
A1,A2 ZP
Thermocouple isolated
from ground B3,B4
Ch2+ C3 I2+
Ch2- C4 I2-
A3,A4 ZP
B5,B6
Ch3+ C5 I3+
Ch3- C6 I3-
A5,A6 ZP
B7,B8
Ch4+ C7 I4+
Ch4- C8 I4-
A7,A8 ZP
B9,B10
Ch5+ C9 I5+
Ch5- C10 I5-
A9,A10 ZP
B11,B12
Thermocouple connected
to ground Ch6+ C11 I6+
Ch6- C12 I6-
A11,A12 ZP
B13,B14
Ch7+ C13 I7+
Ch7- C14 I7-
A13,A14
ZP
B15,B16
Pt100 Ch8+ C15 I8+
Ch8- C16 I8+
A15,A16 ZP
6.3A
L2+ PCJC+
L2+
Fuse
L2-
L2-
EM
Figure 2-26 shows the process connections for the AI835 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
L1+ PCJC-
L1+
L1-
Ch1+ C1 I1+
Ch1- B1 I1-
A1 ZP
Thermocouple isolated
from ground
Ch2+ C2 I2+
Ch2- B2 I2-
A2 ZP
Ch3+ C3 I3+
Ch3- B3 I3-
A3 ZP
Ch4+ C4 I4+
Ch4- B4 I4-
A4 ZP
Ch5+ C5 I5+
Ch5- B5 I5-
A5 ZP
Thermocouple connected
to ground Ch6+ C6 I6+
Ch6- B6 I6-
A6 ZP
Ch7+ C7 I7+
Ch7- B7 I7-
A7 ZP
Pt100 Ch8+ C8 I8+
Ch8- B8 I8+
A8 ZP
L2+ PCJC+
L2+
L2-
EM
Figure 2-26. AI835 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
Figure 2-27 shows the AI835 connections through a remote junction box.
Multi-conductor (Cu)
shielded cables L1+ PCJC-
L1+
L1-
Junction
Thermocouple Box
connected to
ground
Ch1+ C1 I1+
2 Ch1- B1 I1-
A1 ZP
Ch2+ C2 I2+
2 Ch2- B2 I2-
A2 ZP
Ch3+ C3 I3+
2 Ch3- B3 I3-
A3 ZP
Ch4+ C4 I4+
2
Ch4- B4 I4-
A4 ZP
Ch5+ C5 I5+
2
Ch5- B5 I5-
A5 ZP
Ch6+ C6 I6+
2
Ch6- B6 I6-
A6 ZP
Ch7+ C7 I7+
2
Ch7- B7 I7-
A7 ZP
Thermocouple
isolated from
ground Ch8+ C8 I8+
2
Ch8- B8 I8+
A8 ZP
2 L2+ PCJC+
L2+
L2-
EM
Figure 2-27. AI835 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections to Remote Junction Box
Please refer to Table A-10 for all AI835 process connections for each MTU type.
6.3A
L1+ +24V
L1+
Fuse
L1- 0V
L1-
UP1 B1
O2 C3 Ch2 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A3 Ch2 -
UP1 B5
O3 C5 Ch3 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A5 Ch3 -
UP1 B7
O4 C7 Ch4 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A7 Ch4 -
UP1 B9
O5 C9 Ch5 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A9 Ch5 -
UP1 B11
Figure 2-29 shows the process connections for the AO810 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
L1+ +24V
L1+
L1- 0V
UP1
O1 C1 Ch1 + 0 - 20mA RL < 500 ohms
D/A ZP A1 Ch1 - (with power supply
connected to L1+,
UP1 See Note below)
O2 C2 Ch2 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A2 Ch2 -
UP1
O3 C3 Ch3 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A3 Ch3 -
UP1
O4 C4 Ch4 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A4 Ch4 -
UP1
O5 C5 Ch5 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A5 Ch5 -
UP1
O6 C6 Ch6 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A6 Ch6 -
UP1
O7 C7 Ch7 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A7 Ch7 -
UP1
O8 C8 Ch8 + 0 - 20mA
D/A ZP A8 Ch8 -
L2+ +24V
L2+ Note: RL = 400...950 ohms (with power supply
L2- 0V connected to L2+)
EM Power supply min. = 7.7V+0.023*RL
Power Supply = 19.2 to 30V
RL min = 400 ohms (including all outputs)
Figure 2-29. AO810 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
Figure 2-30 shows the process connections for the Analog Output Module AO810 when
installed on an TU812 Compact MTU.
AO810 TU812
+24V UP1 1 1
UP1 14 14
0V ZP1 2 2
ZP1 15 15
UP1 Ch1 + S1 3 3
O1
Ch1 - S2 16 16
D/A ZP
Ch2 + S3 4 4
UP1
Ch2 - S4 17 17
O2
D/A ZP Ch3 + S5 5 5
UP1 Ch3 - S6 18 18
O3 Process
Ch4 + S7 6 6
D/A ZP Connection
UP1 Ch4 - S8 19 19
O4 Ch5 + S9 7 7
D/A ZP
Ch5 - S10 20 20
UP1
Ch6 + S11 8 8
O5
D/A ZP Ch6 - S12 21 21
O6 Ch7 - S14 22 22
D/A ZP
Ch8 + S15 10 10
UP1
Ch8 - S16 23 23
O7
D/A ZP +24V UP2 11 11
UP1 UP2 24 24
O8 0V ZP2 12 12
D/A ZP
ZP2 25 25
EM 13 13
EM
Please refer to Table A-12 for all AO810 process connections for each MTU type.
6.3A
L1+
L1+ RL = <550Ω for
Fuse
L1- current outputs
L1-
D/A
O1U C3 Ch1 V+
ZP1 C4 Ch1 -
D/A
O2U C7 Ch2 V+
ZP2 C8 Ch2 -
Use either the current or
voltage output terminals,
O3I C9 Ch3 I+ but not both per channel.
ZP3 C10 Ch3 -
D/A
O3U C11 Ch3 V+ ±10V
ZP3 C12 Ch3 -
Figure 2-32 shows the process connections for the AO820 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
L1+
L1+
L1-
RL = <550Ω for
current outputs
D/A
O1U C2 Ch1 V+
ZP1 B2 Ch1 -
D/A
O2U C4 Ch2 V+
ZP2 B4 Ch2 -
Use either the current or
voltage output terminals,
O3I C5 Ch3 I+ but not both per channel.
ZP3 B5 Ch3 -
D/A
O3U C6 Ch3 V+ ±10V
ZP3 B6 Ch3 -
O4I C7 Ch4 I+
ZP4 B7 Ch4 -
D/A 0 - 10V
O4U C8 Ch4 V+
ZP4 B8 Ch4 -
L2+
L2+
RL = >2KΩ for
L2-
EM voltage outputs
Figure 2-32. AO820 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
Please refer to Table A-14 for all AO820 process connections for each MTU type.
6.3 A
+24V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1- Fuse
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 C2 I2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
+ L1+ B3,B4 L1+
Ch3 C3 I3
Ch4 C4 I4
- L1- A3,A4 L1-
+ L1+ B5,A6 L1+
Ch5 C5 I5
Ch6 C6 I6
- L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
Ch7 C7 I7
Ch8 C8 I8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
Ch9 C9 I9
Ch10 C10 I10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
+ L2+ B11,B12 L2+
Ch11 C11 I11
Ch12 C12 I12
- L2- A11,A12 L2-
+ L2+ B13,B14 L2+
Ch13 C13 I13
Ch14 C14 I14
- L2- A13,A14
L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
Ch15 C15 I15
Ch16 C16 I16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
+24V L2+ Supervise
L2+
0V L2-
Fuse
L2- EM
Figure 2-34 shows the process connections for the DI810 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
+24V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1-
L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 B1 I2
L1- A1 L1-
+ L1+
Ch3 C2 I3
Ch4 B2 I4
- L1- A2 L1-
+ L1+
Ch5 C3 I5
Ch6 B3 I6
- L1- A3 L1-
L1+
Ch7 C4 I7
Ch8 B4 I8
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
Ch9 C5 I9
Ch10 B5 I10
L2- A5 L2-
+ L2+
Ch11 C6 I11
Ch12 B6 I12
- L2- A6 L2-
+ L2+
Ch13 C7 I13
Ch14 B7 I14
- L2- A7 L2-
L2+
Ch15 C8 I15
Ch16 B8 I16
L2- A8 L2-
+24V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
EM
Figure 2-34. DI810 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
Figure 2-35 shows the process connections for the DI810 when installed on a TU812 Compact
MTU.
TU812 DI810
1 1 UP1 +24V
Supervise
14 14 UP1
2 2 ZP1 0V
L1+
15 15 ZP1 I1
I2
3 3 S1 Ch1 L1-
16 16 S2 Ch2 L1+
I3
4 4 S3 Ch3 I4
L1-
17 17 S4 Ch4
L1+
5 5 S5 Ch5 I5
I6
18 18 S6 Ch6 L1-
Process 6 L1+
6 S7 Ch7
Connection I7
19 19 S8 Ch8 I8
L1-
7 7 S9 Ch9
L2+
20 20 S10 Ch10 I9
I10
8 8 S11 Ch11 L2-
21 21 S12 Ch12
L2+
I11
9 9 S13 Ch13
I12
L2-
22 22 S14 Ch14
L2+
10 10 S15 Ch15 I13
I14
23 23 S16 Ch16 L2-
L2+
11 11 UP2 +24V I15
24 UP2
I16
24
L2-
12 12 ZP2 0V
25 25 ZP2 Supervise
13 13 EM
EM
Please refer to Table A-27 for all DI810 process connections for each MTU type.
6.3 A
+48V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1- Fuse
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 C2 I2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
+ L1+ B3,B4 L1+
Ch3 C3 I3
Ch4 C4 I4
- L1- A3,A4 L1-
+ L1+ B5,A6 L1+
Ch5 C5 I5
Ch6 C6 I6
- L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
Ch7 C7 I7
Ch8 C8 I8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
Ch9 C9 I9
Ch10 C10 I10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
+ L2+ B11,B12 L2+
Ch11 C11 I11
Ch12 C12 I12
- L2- A11,A12 L2-
+ L2+ B13,B14 L2+
Ch13 C13 I13
Ch14 C14 I14
- L2- A13,A14
L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
Ch15 C15 I15
Ch16 C16 I16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
+48V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
Fuse
L2- EM
Figure 2-37 shows the process connections for the DI811 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
+48V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1-
L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 B1 I2
L1- A1 L1-
+ L1+
Ch3 C2 I3
Ch4 B2 I4
- L1- A2 L1-
+ L1+
Ch5 C3 I5
Ch6 B3 I6
- L1- A3 L1-
L1+
Ch7 C4 I7
Ch8 B4 I8
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
Ch9 C5 I9
Ch10 B5 I10
L2- A5 L2-
+ L2+
Ch11 C6 I11
Ch12 B6 I12
- L2- A6 L2-
+ L2+
Ch13 C7 I13
Ch14 B7 I14
- L2- A7 L2-
L2+
Ch15 C8 I15
Ch16 B8 I16
L2- A8 L2-
+48V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
EM
Figure 2-37. DI811 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
Please refer to Table A-29 for all DI811 process connections for each MTU type.
6.3 A
+24V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1- Fuse
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 C2 I2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
+ L1+ B3,B4 L1+
Ch3 C3 I3
Ch4 C4 I4
- L1- A3,A4 L1-
+ L1+ B5,A6 L1+
Ch5 C5 I5
Ch6 C6 I6
- L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
Ch7 C7 I7
Ch8 C8 I8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
Ch9 C9 I9
Ch10 C10 I10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
+ L2+ B11,B12 L2+
Ch11 C11 I11
Ch12 C12 I12
- L2- A11,A12 L2-
+ L2+ B13,B14 L2+
Ch13 C13 I13
Ch14 C14 I14
- L2- A13,A14
L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
Ch15 C15 I15
Ch16 C16 I16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
+24V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
Fuse
L2- EM
Figure 2-39 shows the process connections for the DI814 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
+24V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1-
L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 B1 I2
L1- A1 L1-
+ L1+
Ch3 C2 I3
Ch4 B2 I4
- L1- A2 L1-
+ L1+
Ch5 C3 I5
Ch6 B3 I6
- L1- A3 L1-
L1+
Ch7 C4 I7
Ch8 B4 I8
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
Ch9 C5 I9
Ch10 B5 I10
L2- A5 L2-
+ L2+
Ch11 C6 I11
Ch12 B6 I12
- L2- A6 L2-
+ L2+
Ch13 C7 I13
Ch14 B7 I14
- L2- A7 L2-
L2+
Ch15 C8 I15
Ch16 B8 I16
L2- A8 L2-
+24V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
EM
Figure 2-39. DI814 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
Figure 2-40 shows the process connections for the DI814 when installed on a TU812 Compact
MTU.
TU812 DI814
1 1 UP1 +24V
Supervise
14 14 UP1
2 2 ZP1 0V
L1+
15 15 ZP1 I1
I2
3 3 S1 Ch1 L1-
16 16 S2 Ch2 L1+
I3
4 4 S3 Ch3 I4
L1-
17 17 S4 Ch4
L1+
5 5 S5 Ch5 I5
I6
18 18 S6 Ch6 L1-
Process
6 6 S7 Ch7 L1+
Connection I7
19 19 S8 Ch8 I8
L1-
7 7 S9 Ch9
L2+
20 20 S10 Ch10 I9
I10
8 8 S11 Ch11 L2-
21 21 S12 Ch12
L2+
I11
9 9 S13 Ch13
I12
L2-
22 22 S14 Ch14
L2+
10 10 S15 Ch15 I13
I14
23 23 S16 Ch16 L2-
L2+
11 11 UP2 +24V I15
24 UP2
I16
24
L2-
12 12 ZP2 0V
25 25 ZP2 Supervise
13 13 EM
EM
Please refer to Table A-31 for all DI814 process connections for each MTU type.
120V a.c.
Ch1.1 B1 I 1.1
Ch1.2 A1 I 1.2
Ch2.1 B2 I 2.1
Ch2.2 A2 I 2.2
Ch3.1 B3 I 3.1
Ch3.2 A3 I 3.2
Ch4.1 B4 I 4.1
Ch4.2 A4 I 4.2
Ch5.1 B5 I 5.1
120V a.c. Ch5.2 A5 I 5.2
Ch6.1 B6 I 6.1
Ch6.2 A6 I 6.2
Ch7.1 B7 I 7.1
Ch7.2 A7 I 7.2
Ch8.1 B8 I 8.1
Ch8.2 A8 I 8.2
EM
Figure 2-42 shows the process connections for the DI820 when installed on a TU811 Compact
MTU.
120V a.c.
Ch1.1 B1 I 1.1
Ch1.2 A1 I 1.2
Ch2.1 C2 I 2.1
Ch2.2 A2 I 2.2
Ch3.1 B3 I 3.1
Ch3.2 A3 I 3.2
Ch4.1 C4 I 4.1
Ch4.2 A4 I 4.2
Ch5.1 B5 I 5.1
120V a.c. Ch5.2 A5 I 5.2
Ch6.1 C6 I 6.1
Ch6.2 A6 I 6.2
Ch7.1 B7 I 7.1
Ch7.2 A7 I 7.2
Ch8.1 C8 I 8.1
Ch8.2 A8 I 8.2
EM
Please refer to Table A-33 for all DI820 process connections for each MTU type.
230V a.c.
Ch1.1 B1 I 1.1
Ch1.2 A1 I 1.2
Ch2.1 B2 I 2.1
Ch2.2 A2 I 2.2
Ch3.1 B3 I 3.1
Ch3.2 A3 I 3.2
Ch4.1 B4 I 4.1
Ch4.2 A4 I 4.2
Ch5.1 B5 I 5.1
230V a.c. Ch5.2 A5 I 5.2
Ch6.1 B6 I 6.1
Ch6.2 A6 I 6.2
Ch7.1 B7 I 7.1
Ch7.2 A7 I 7.2
Ch8.1 B8 I 8.1
Ch8.2 A8 I 8.2
EM
Figure 2-44 shows the process connections for the DI821 when installed on a TU811 Compact
MTU.
230V a.c.
Ch1.1 B1 I 1.1
Ch1.2 A1 I 1.2
Ch2.1 C2 I 2.1
Ch2.2 A2 I 2.2
Ch3.1 B3 I 3.1
Ch3.2 A3 I 3.2
Ch4.1 C4 I 4.1
Ch4.2 A4 I 4.2
B5 I 5.1
Ch5.1
230V a.c. Ch5.2 A5 I 5.2
Ch6.1 C6 I 6.1
Ch6.2 A6 I 6.2
Ch7.1 B7 I 7.1
Ch7.2 A7 I 7.2
Ch8.1 C8 I 8.1
Ch8.2 A8 I 8.2
EM
Please refer to Table A-35 for all DI821 process connections for each MTU type.
6.3 A
+24V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1- Fuse
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 C2 I2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
+ L1+ B3,B4 L1+
Ch3 C3 I3
Ch4 C4 I4
- L1- A3,A4 L1-
+ L1+ B5,A6 L1+
Ch5 C5 I5
Ch6 C6 I6
- L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
Ch7 C7 I7
Ch8 C8 I8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
Ch9 C9 I9
Ch10 C10 I10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
+ L2+ B11,B12 L2+
Ch11 C11 I11
Ch12 C12 I12
- L2- A11,A12 L2-
+ L2+ B13,B14 L2+
Ch13 C13 I13
Ch14 C14 I14
- L2- A13,A14
L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
Ch15 C15 I15
Ch16 C16 I16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
+24V L2+ Supervise
L2+
0V L2-
Fuse
L2- EM
Figure 2-46 shows the process connections for the DI830 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
+24V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1-
L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 B1 I2
L1- A1 L1-
+ L1+
Ch3 C2 I3
Ch4 B2 I4
- L1- A2 L1-
+ L1+
Ch5 C3 I5
Ch6 B3 I6
- L1- A3 L1-
L1+
Ch7 C4 I7
Ch8 B4 I8
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
Ch9 C5 I9
Ch10 B5 I10
L2- A5 L2-
+ L2+
Ch11 C6 I11
Ch12 B6 I12
- L2- A6 L2-
+ L2+
Ch13 C7 I13
Ch14 B7 I14
- L2- A7 L2-
L2+
Ch15 C8 I15
Ch16 B8 I16
L2- A8 L2-
+24V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
EM
Figure 2-46. DI830 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
Figure 2-47 shows the process connections for the DI830 when installed on a TU812 Compact
MTU.
TU812 DI830
1 1 UP1 +24V
Supervise
14 14 UP1
2 2 ZP1 0V
L1+
15 15 ZP1 I1
I2
3 3 S1 Ch1 L1-
16 16 S2 Ch2 L1+
I3
4 4 S3 Ch3 I4
L1-
17 17 S4 Ch4
L1+
5 5 S5 Ch5 I5
I6
18 18 S6 Ch6 L1-
Process 6 L1+
6 S7 Ch7
Connection I7
19 19 S8 Ch8 I8
L1-
7 7 S9 Ch9
L2+
20 20 S10 Ch10 I9
I10
8 8 S11 Ch11 L2-
21 21 S12 Ch12
L2+
I11
9 9 S13 Ch13
I12
L2-
22 22 S14 Ch14
L2+
10 10 S15 Ch15 I13
I14
23 23 S16 Ch16 L2-
L2+
11 11 UP2 +24V I15
24 UP2
I16
24
L2-
12 12 ZP2 0V
25 25 ZP2 Supervise
13 13 EM
EM
Please refer to Table A-37 for all DI830 process connections for each MTU type.
6.3 A
+48V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1- Fuse
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 C2 I2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
+ L1+ B3,B4 L1+
Ch3 C3 I3
Ch4 C4 I4
- L1- A3,A4 L1-
+ L1+ B5,A6 L1+
Ch5 C5 I5
Ch6 C6 I6
- L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
Ch7 C7 I7
Ch8 C8 I8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
Ch9 C9 I9
Ch10 C10 I10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
+ L2+ B11,B12 L2+
Ch11 C11 I11
Ch12 C12 I12
- L2- A11,A12 L2-
+ L2+ B13,B14 L2+
Ch13 C13 I13
Ch14 C14 I14
- L2- A13,A14
L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
Ch15 C15 I15
Ch16 C16 I16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
+48V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
Fuse
L2- EM
Figure 2-49 shows the process connections for the DI831 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
+48V L1+
L1+ Supervise
0V L1-
L1+
Ch1 C1 I1
Ch2 B1 I2
L1- A1 L1-
+ L1+
Ch3 C2 I3
Ch4 B2 I4
- L1- A2 L1-
+ L1+
Ch5 C3 I5
Ch6 B3 I6
- L1- A3 L1-
L1+
Ch7 C4 I7
Ch8 B4 I8
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
Ch9 C5 I9
Ch10 B5 I10
L2- A5 L2-
+ L2+
Ch11 C6 I11
Ch12 B6 I12
- L2- A6 L2-
+ L2+
Ch13 C7 I13
Ch14 B7 I14
- L2- A7 L2-
L2+
Ch15 C8 I15
Ch16 B8 I16
L2- A8 L2-
+48V L2+
L2+ Supervise
0V L2-
EM
Figure 2-49. DI831 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
Figure 2-50 shows the process connections for the DI831 when installed on a TU812 Compact
MTU.
TU812 DI831
1 1 UP1 +24V
Supervise
14 14 UP1
2 2 ZP1 0V
L1+
15 15 ZP1 I1
I2
3 3 S1 Ch1 L1-
16 16 S2 Ch2 L1+
I3
4 4 S3 Ch3 I4
L1-
17 17 S4 Ch4
L1+
5 5 S5 Ch5 I5
I6
18 18 S6 Ch6 L1-
Process 6 L1+
6 S7 Ch7
Connection I7
19 19 S8 Ch8 I8
L1-
7 7 S9 Ch9
L2+
20 20 S10 Ch10 I9
I10
8 8 S11 Ch11 L2-
21 21 S12 Ch12
L2+
I11
9 9 S13 Ch13
I12
L2-
22 22 S14 Ch14
L2+
10 10 S15 Ch15 I13
I14
23 23 S16 Ch16 L2-
L2+
11 11 UP2 +24V I15
24 UP2
I16
24
L2-
12 12 ZP2 0V
25 25 ZP2 Supervise
13 13 EM
EM
Please refer to Table A-39 for all DI831 process connections for each MTU type.
Process TU830
DI885
+ +
24V
_ 48V_
6.3 A
24V+ L1+
Pwr. L1+
Sup. 0V L1- Fuse
L1-
47K Ch1 C1 I1
48V C2 L+
L1- A1,A2 L-
Ch2 C3 I2
48V C4 L+
L1- A3,A4 L-
Ch3 C5 I3
48V C6 L+
L1- A5,A6 L-
Ch4 C7 I4
48V C8 L+
L1- A7,A8 L-
Ch5 C9 I5
48V C10 L+
A9,A10
Ch6 C11 I6
48V C12 L+
A11,A12
Ch7 C13 I7
48V C14 L+
A13,A14
6.3 A
48V+ L2+
Pwr. L2+
Fuse
Sup. 0V L2-
L2- EM
Figure 2-52 shows the process connections for the DI885 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
Process TU810
DI885
(or TU814)
+ +
24V
_ 48V_
24V+ L1+
Pwr. L1+
Sup. 0V L1-
47K Ch1 C1 I1
48V B1 L+
L1- A1 L-
Ch2 C2 I2
48V B2 L+
L1- A2 L-
Ch3 C3 I3
48V B3 L+
L1- A3 L-
Ch4 C4 I4
48V B4 L+
L1- A4 L-
Ch5 C5 I5
48V B5 L+
A5
Ch6 C6 I6
48V B6 L+
A6
Ch7 C7 I7
48V B7 L+
A7
47K Ch8 C8 I8
48V B8 L+
A8
48V+ L2+
Pwr. L2+
Sup. 0V L2-
EM
Figure 2-52. DI885 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
Please refer to Table A-41 for all DI885 process connections for each MTU type.
6.3 A
L1+ +24V
Supervise L1+
Fuse L1- 0V
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
O1 C1 Ch1
O2 C2 Ch2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
L1+ B3,B4 L1+
O3 C3 Ch3
O4 C4 Ch4
L1- A3,A4 L1-
L1+ B5,A6 L1+
O5 C5 Ch5
O6 C6 Ch6
L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
O7 C7 Ch7
O8 C8 Ch8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
O9 C9 Ch9
O 10 C10 Ch10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
L2+ B11,B12 L2+
O 11 C11 Ch11
O 12 C12 Ch12
L2- A11,A12 L2-
L2+ B13,B14 L2+
O 13 C13 Ch13
O 14 C14 Ch14
L2- A13,A14 L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
O 15 C15 Ch15
O 16 C16 Ch16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
L2+ +24V
Supervise L2+
Fuse L2- 0V
EM L2-
Figure 2-54 shows the process connections for the DO810 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
L1+ +24V
Supervise L1+
L1- 0V
L1+
O1 C1 Ch1
O2 B1 Ch2
L1- A1 L1-
L1+
O3 C2 Ch3
O4 B2 Ch4
L1- A2 L1-
L1+
O5 C3 Ch5
O6 B3 Ch6
L1- A3 L1-
L1+
O7 C4 Ch7
O8 B4 Ch8
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
O9 C5 Ch9
O 10 B5 Ch10
L2- A5 L2-
L2+
O 11 C6 Ch11
O 12 B6 Ch12
L2- A6 L2-
L2+
O 13 C7 Ch13
O 14 B7 Ch14
L2- A7 L2-
L2+
O 15 C8 Ch15
O 16 B8 Ch16
L2- A8 L2-
L2+ +24V
Supervise L2+
L2- 0V
EM
Figure 2-54. DO810 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
Figure 2-55 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO810 when
installed on an TU812 Compact MTU.
DO810 TU812
+24V UP1 1 1
Supervise
UP1 14 14
0V ZP1 2 2
L1+
O1 ZP1 15 15
O2
L1- Ch1 S1 3 3
L1+ Ch2 S2 16 16
O3
O4 Ch3 S3 4 4
L1-
Ch4 S4 17 17
L1+
O5 Ch5 S5 5 5
O6
L1- Ch6 S6 18 18
Process
L1+ Ch7 S7 6 6
O7 Connection
O8 Ch8 S8 19 19
L1-
Ch9 S9 7 7
L2+
O9 Ch10 S10 20 20
O 10
L2- Ch11 S11 8 8
L2+ Ch12 S12 21 21
O 11
O 12 Ch13 S13 9 9
L2-
Ch14 S14 22 22
L2+
O 13 Ch15 S15 10 10
O 14
L2- Ch16 S16 23 23
L2+
O 15 +24V UP2 11 11
O 16
L2- UP2 24 24
0V ZP2 12 12
Supervise
ZP2 25 25
EM EM 13 13
Please refer to Table A-43 for all DO810 process connections for each MTU type.
6.3 A
L1+ +24V
Supervise L1+
Fuse L1- 0V
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
O1 C1 Ch1
O2 C2 Ch2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
L1+ B3,B4 L1+
O3 C3 Ch3
O4 C4 Ch4
L1- A3,A4 L1-
L1+ B5,A6 L1+
O5 C5 Ch5
O6 C6 Ch6
L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
O7 C7 Ch7
O8 C8 Ch8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
O9 C9 Ch9
O 10 C10 Ch10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
L2+ B11,B12 L2+
O 11 C11 Ch11
O 12 C12 Ch12
L2- A11,A12 L2-
L2+ B13,B14 L2+
O 13 C13 Ch13
O 14 C14 Ch14
L2- A13,A14 L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
O 15 C15 Ch15
O 16 C16 Ch16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
L2+ +24V
Supervise L2+
Fuse L2- 0V
EM L2-
Figure 2-57 shows the process connections for the DO814 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU.
L1+
O1 C1 Ch1
O2 B1 Ch2
L1- A1 L1-
L1+
O3 C2 Ch3
O4 B2 Ch4
L1- A2 L1-
L1+
O5 C3 Ch5
O6 B3 Ch6
L1- A3 L1-
L1+
O7 C4 Ch7
O8 B4 Ch8
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
O9 C5 Ch9
O 10 B5 Ch10
L2- A5 L2-
L2+
O 11 C6 Ch11
O 12 B6 Ch12
L2- A6 L2-
L2+
O 13 C7 Ch13
O 14 B7 Ch14
L2- A7 L2-
L2+
O 15 C8 Ch15
O 16 B8 Ch16
L2- A8 L2-
L2+ +24V
Supervise L2+ 24V Power
L2- 0V Supply
EM
Figure 2-57. DO814 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
Figure 2-58 shows the process connections for the Digital Output Module DO814 when
installed on an TU812 Compact MTU.
DO814 TU812
+24V UP1 1 1
Supervise
UP1 14 14
0V ZP1 2 2
L1+
O1 ZP1 15 15
O2
L1- Ch1 S1 3 3
L1+ Ch2 S2 16 16
O3
O4 Ch3 S3 4 4
L1-
Ch4 S4 17 17
L1+
O5 Ch5 S5 5 5
O6
L1- Ch6 S6 18 18
Process
L1+ Ch7 S7 6 6
O7 Connection
O8 Ch8 S8 19 19
L1-
Ch9 S9 7 7
L2+
O9 Ch10 S10 20 20
O 10
L2- Ch11 S11 8 8
L2+ Ch12 S12 21 21
O 11
O 12 Ch13 S13 9 9
L2-
Ch14 S14 22 22
L2+
O 13 Ch15 S15 10 10
O 14
L2- Ch16 S16 23 23
L2+
O 15 +24V UP2 11 11
O 16
L2- UP2 24 24
0V ZP2 12 12
Supervise
ZP2 25 25
EM EM 13 13
Please refer to Table A-45 for all DO814 process connections for each MTU type.
6.3 A
L1+ +24V
L1+
Fuse L1- 0V
L1-
L1+ B1,B2 L1+
C1 Ch1
O1 C2
L1- A1,A2 L1-
L1+ B3,B4 L1+
C3 Ch2
O2 C4
L1- A3,A4 L1-
L1+ B5,A6 L1+
C5 Ch3
O3 C6
L1- A5,A6 L1-
L1+ B7,B8 L1+
C7 Ch4
O4 C8
L1- A7,A8 L1-
L2+ B9,B10 L2+
C9 Ch5
O5 C10
L2- A9,A10 L2-
L2+ B11,B12 L2+
C11 Ch6
O6 C12
L2- A11,A12 L2-
L2+ B13,B14 L2+
C13 Ch7
O7 C14
L2- A13,A14 L2-
L2+ B15,A16 L2+
C15 Ch8
O8 C16
L2- A15,A16 L2-
6.3 A
L2+ +24V
L2+
Fuse L2- 0V
EM L2-
Figure 2-60 shows the process connections for the DO815 when installed on a TU810 or TU814
Compact MTU
L1+ +24V
L1- 0V
L1+
C1 Ch1
O1 B1
L1- A1 L1-
L1+
C2 Ch2
O2 B2
L1- A2 L1-
L1+
C3 Ch3
O3 B3
L1- A3 L1-
L1+
C4 Ch4
O4 B4
L1- A4 L1-
L2+
C5 Ch5
O5 B5
L2- A5 L2-
L2+
C6 Ch6
O6 B6
L2- A6 L2-
L2+
C7 Ch7
O7 B7
L2- A7
L2+
C8 Ch8
O8 B8
L2- A8 L2-
L2+ +24V
L2- 0V
EM
Figure 2-60. DO815 with TU810 or TU814 Compact MTU Process Connections
5 - 250V
a.c/d.c.
O 1.1 B1 Ch1.1
O 1.2 A1 Ch1.2
O 2.1 B2 Ch2.1
O 2.2 A2 Ch2.2
O 3.1 B3 Ch3.1
O 3.2 A3 Ch3.2
O 4.1 B4 Ch4.1
O 4.2 A4 Ch4.2
O 6.1 B6 Ch6.1
O 6.2 A6 Ch6.2
O 7.1 B7 Ch7.1
O 7.2 A7 Ch7.2
O 8.1 B8 Ch8.1
O 8.2 A8 Ch8.2
EM
Figure 2-62 shows the process connections for the DO820 when installed on a TU811 Compact
MTU.
5 - 250V
a.c/d.c.
O 1.1 B1 Ch1.1
O 1.2 A1 Ch1.2
O 2.1 C2 Ch2.1
O 2.2 A2 Ch2.2
O 3.1 B3 Ch3.1
O 3.2 A3 Ch3.2
O 4.1 C4 Ch4.1
O 4.2 A4 Ch4.2
O 5.1 B5 Ch5.1
O 5.2 A5 Ch5.2 5 - 250V
a.c/d.c.
O 6.1 C6 Ch6.1
O 6.2 A6 Ch6.2
O 7.1 B7 Ch7.1
O 7.2 A7 Ch7.2
O 8.1 C8 Ch8.1
O 8.2 A8 Ch8.2
EM
Figure 2-63 shows the process connections for the DO820 when installed on a TU836 Extended
MTU.
3.15A
O 1.1 11 Ch1.1
O 1.2 12 Ch1.2
3.15A
O 2.1 21 Ch2.1
O 2.2 22 Ch2.2
3.15A
O 3.1 31 Ch3.1
O 3.2 32 Ch3.2
3.15A
O 4.1 41 Ch4.1
O 4.2 42 Ch4.2
3.15A
O 5.1 51 Ch5.1
O 5.2 52 Ch5.2
3.15A
O 6.1 61 Ch6.1
O 6.2 62 Ch6.2
3.15A
O 7.1 71 Ch7.1
O 7.2 72 Ch7.2
3.15A
O 8.1 81 Ch8.1
O 8.2 82 Ch8.2
L2
L2 5 - 250V
N2 a.c/d.c.
EM N2
Figure 2-64 shows the process connections for the DO820 when installed on a TU837 Extended
MTU.
O 1.1 B1 Ch1.1
O 1.2 A1 Ch1.2
3.15A
11
O 2.1 B2 Ch2.1
O 2.2 A2 Ch2.2
3.15A
12 Bridging
O 3.1 B3 Ch3.1
O 3.2 A3 Ch3.2
3.15A
13
O 4.1 B4 Ch4.1
O 4.2 A4 Ch4.2
3.15A 14
230V
O 5.1 B5 Ch5.1
O 5.2 A5 Ch5.2
3.15A 25
O 6.1 B6 Ch6.1
O 6.2 A6 Ch6.2
3.15A 26 Bridging
O 7.1 B7 Ch7.1
O 7.2 A7 Ch7.2
3.15A
27
O 8.1 B8 Ch8.1
O 8.2 A8 Ch8.2
3.15A 230V
28
N2
230V
ZP2 N2
EM
Please refer to Table A-49 for all DO820 process connections for each MTU type.
5 - 250V
a.c/d.c.
O 1.1 B1 Ch1.1
O 1.2 A1 Ch1.2
O 2.1 B2 Ch2.1
O 2.2 A2 Ch2.2
O 3.1 B3 Ch3.1
O 3.2 A3 Ch3.2
O 4.1 B4 Ch4.1
O 4.2 A4 Ch4.2
O 6.1 B6 Ch6.1
O 6.2 A6 Ch6.2
O 7.1 B7 Ch7.1
O 7.2 A7 Ch7.2
O 8.1 B8 Ch8.1
O 8.2 A8 Ch8.2
EM
Figure 2-66 shows the process connections for the DO821 when installed on a TU811 Compact
MTU.
5 - 250V
a.c/d.c.
O 1.1 B1 Ch1.1
O 1.2 A1 Ch1.2
O 2.1 C2 Ch2.1
O 2.2 A2 Ch2.2
O 3.1 B3 Ch3.1
O 3.2 A3 Ch3.2
O 4.1 C4 Ch4.1
O 4.2 A4 Ch4.2
O 5.1 B5 Ch5.1
O 5.2 A5 Ch5.2 5 - 250V
a.c/d.c.
O 6.1 C6 Ch6.1
O 6.2 A6 Ch6.2
O 7.1 B7 Ch7.1
O 7.2 A7 Ch7.2
O 8.1 C8 Ch8.1
O 8.2 A8 Ch8.2
EM
Figure 2-67 shows the process connections for the DO821 when installed on a TU836 Extended
MTU.
3.15A
O 1.1 11 Ch1.1
O 1.2 12 Ch1.2
3.15A
O 2.1 21 Ch2.1
O 2.2 22 Ch2.2
3.15A
O 3.1 31 Ch3.1
O 3.2 32 Ch3.2
3.15A
O 4.1 41 Ch4.1
O 4.2 42 Ch4.2
3.15A
O 5.1 51 Ch5.1
O 5.2 52 Ch5.2
3.15A
O 6.1 61 Ch6.1
O 6.2 62 Ch6.2
3.15A
O 7.1 71 Ch7.1
O 7.2 72 Ch7.2
3.15A
O 8.1 81 Ch8.1
O 8.2 82 Ch8.2
L2
L2 5 - 250V
N2 a.c/d.c.
EM N2
Figure 2-68 shows the process connections for the DO821 when installed on a TU837 Extended
MTU.
O 1.1 B1 Ch1.1
O 1.2 A1 Ch1.2
3.15A
11
O 2.1 B2 Ch2.1
O 2.2 A2 Ch2.2
3.15A
12 Bridging
O 3.1 B3 Ch3.1
O 3.2 A3 Ch3.2
3.15A
13
O 4.1 B4 Ch4.1
O 4.2 A4 Ch4.2
3.15A 14
230V
O 5.1 B5 Ch5.1
O 5.2 A5 Ch5.2
3.15A 25
O 6.1 B6 Ch6.1
O 6.2 A6 Ch6.2
3.15A 26 Bridging
O 7.1 B7 Ch7.1
O 7.2 A7 Ch7.2
3.15A
27
O 8.1 B8 Ch8.1
O 8.2 A8 Ch8.2
3.15A 230V
28
N2
230V
ZP2 N2
EM
Please refer to Table A-51 for all DO821 process connections for each MTU type.
C2 CB+_1
+ VB_11
B
- B2 CB-_1
VB_12
A2
C3 CST+_1
+ VST_11
ST
B3 CST-_1
- VST_12
A3
C4 DI_1
L1+
B4 DO_1
L1+
A4
V+
+5V
0V
C5 CA+_2
A VA_21
B5 CA-_2
VA_22
A5
C6 CB+_2
B VB_21
B6 CB-_2
VB_22
A6
C7 CST+_2
ST VST_21
B7 CST-_2
VST_22
A7
C8 DI_2
L2+
B8 DO_2
L1+
A8
L2+
V+ +24V L2+ L2+
0V 0V L2- L2-
EM
Figure 2-70 shows the process connections for DP820 when installed on a TU812 MTU.
1 1 TU812
14 14 L1+ DP820
2 2 L1-
15 15 CA+_1
3 3 VA_11
16 16 CA-_1
VA_12
4 4 CB+_1
VB_11
17 17 CB-_1
VB_12
5 5 CST+_1
VST_11
18 18 CST-_1
VST_12
6 6 DI_1
L1+
PROCESS 19
19 DO_1
CONNECTION L1+
7 7 CA+_2
VA_21
20 20 CA-_2
VA_22
8 8 CB+_2
VB_21
21 21 CB-_2
VB_22
9 9 CST+_2
VST_21
22 22 CST-_2
VST_22
10 10 DI_2
L2+
23 23 DO_2
11 L2+
11
24 24 L2+
12 12 L2-
25 25
13 13 EM
Figure 2-71 shows the process connections for DP820 when installed on a TU830 MTU, and
with RS422 transducer connected to channel 1 and +5V transducer to channel 2.
C3 CB+_1
+ B3 VB_11
B A3
- C4 CB-_1
B4 VB_12
A4
C5 CST+_1
+ B5 VST_11
ST A5
- B6 CST-_1
C6 VST_12
A6
C7 DI_1
B7 L1+
A7
C8 DO_1
B8 L1+
A8
V+
5V 0V
C1 CA+_2
A B1 VA_21
A1
C2 CA-_2
B2 VA_22
A2
C3 CB+_2
B
B3 VB_21
A3
C4 CB-_2
B4 VB_22
A4
C5 CST+_2
ST
B5 VST_21
A5
B6 CST-_2
C6 VST_22
A6
C7 DI_2
B7 L2+
A7
C8 DO_2
B8 L1+
A8
L2+
V+ +24V L2+ 6.3A L2+
0V 0V L2- Fuse L2-
L2- EM
Figure 2-71. DP820 with TU830 MTU Process Connections and with Transducer Connections
Figure 2-72 shows the process connections for DP820 when installed on a TU830 MTU, and
with +24V transducer connected to channel 1 and +12V transducer to channel 2.
C3 CB+_1
B B3 VB_11
A3
C4 CB-_1
B4 VB_12
A4
C5 CST+_1
ST B5 VST_11
A5
C6 CST-_1
B6 VST_12
A6
C7 DI_1
B7 L1+
A7
C8 DO_1
B8 L1+
A8
12V
12V 0V
CA+_2
C1
A B1 VA_21
A1
1.8k CA-_2
C2
B2 VA_22
A2
C3 CB+_2
B B3 VB_21
A3
1.8k CB-_2
C4
B4 VB_22
A4
C5 CST+_2
ST B5 VST_21
A5
1.8k
B6 CST-_2
C6 VST_22
A6
C7 DI_2
B7 L2+
A7
C8 DO_2
B8 L1+
A8
L2+
+24V L2+ 6.3A L2+
POWER
SUPPLY 0V L2- Fuse L2-
12V L2- EM
Figure 2-72. DP820 with TU830 MTU Process Connections and Transducer Connections
Overhead Clearances
Min 150 mm
(6 Inches)
Figure 2-73. Minimum Distance to Cabinetry
To ensure adequate ventilation, there should be a free space, 150 mm (6") high, between the top
of the cabinet and the ceiling, the underside of any beam, duct or similar object over the cabinet.
When cables enter the cabinet from above, the space available should be at least 1000 mm (40")
high to provide working space, see Figure 2-73.
(1.6 inches)
Min 40 mm
Standoffs for Wall
Mounted Enclosures
Min 40 mm
(1.6 inches)
Figure 2-74. Minimum Distance from Rear and Side of Cabinet to a Wall
The distance between the rear and the sides of the cabinet and an adjacent wall should be no less
than 40 mm (1.6 inches), see Figure 2-74. This will ensure good ventilation.
The free space in front of the cabinet should be the width of the door plus aisle width.
Wall mounted enclosures should use standoffs equal to the clearance requirements.
2.2 Setup
After some general information in the following section, you will find individual setup
descriptions for different parts of the system. The information is given under the following
headings if relevant.
• Assembly
• Electric Installation (including Power Supply)
• Functional Measures
• Preparation for Start Up
Standard installation drawings, terminal diagram forms, and connection documents for site
preparation and installation of electrical equipment may apply also.
Equipment Required
The following is a minimum requirement:
• Ordinary hand tools
• Universal instrument, for example, digital multimeter.
• Necessary parts of the documentation listed in Section 1.4, Related Documentation.
• Specific documentation enclosed with the equipment, drawings and so on.
DANGER
Work with care when supply voltage is applied in the system. The voltage in
the cabinet can cause serious injury or death.
• All who work in the installation must know the location of the main power supply switch
to the equipment and how it is operated.
• When the subsections of the process are checked and a test run has been performed,
interlocking links are to be checked by a responsible engineer. All assembly personnel
must be informed about test runs to be performed.
• Process technicians are to be present when testing and operating the process device.
2.2.2 Grounding
This section describes where and how grounding is to be done in a cabinet or small enclosures.
You should be aware of the common ABB Installation Rules manual which establishes the
principals of grounding, knowing when an equipment, a circuit or a cable shield should be
grounded. It also gives alternative solutions adapted to specific plant requirements.
General
When cabinets are connected together, it forms a stable ground plane for all equipment installed.
The signal processing electronics in the controller as well as all interference suppression for
external signals is normally directly grounded to chassis and plant ground.
Protective Ground
The main power source distribution normally includes a protected ground wire. This shall be
connected to the PE (Protected Earth) terminal block on a primary power switch unit. Use cable
lug connectors when connecting on the ground screw.
Ground Line
The cabinet is to be grounded with a copper lead (≥35 mm, 2 AWG) to the plant ground line.
Cabinets in a row shall be individually connected to the plant ground plane as required.
NOTE
Do not ground a signal at different points in the plant.
General
Cabinets erected side by side including a controller and I/O configuration are regarded as a unit,
and are connected to the a.c. (d.c.) power in one single connection point, the centralized Power
Switch unit. The switch unit is normally located in the controller cabinet bay.
The power can be distributed to the I/O cabinets as required by the installed equipment
(Figure 2-75).
Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2
Controller S800 I/O
Power Supp.
Power Power
Supp. Supp.
Power
Switch
Power
Switch
Phase
Neutral
Phase
Neutral Ground
3-wire cables
Ground Cabinet Enclosure
Assembly
Information regarding location of equipment may be found in the documentation delivered with
the equipment. Some general I/O Station information is presented below.
• Install a DIN-rail sized to allow installation of the FCI, ModuleBus Modem, MTUs,
terminator and power supply(s). Some extra DIN-rail should be allowed for expansion or
the moving of the FCI, ModuleBus Modem or MTUs during maintenance.
• Install the FCI, ModuleBus Modem on the left end of the DIN-rail leaving some room to
the left to allow removable from the first MTU. If vertical mounting is used, leave room to
the top of the FCI for removal.
• Install the first MTU to the right (below) of the FCI or ModuleBus Modem and all other
MTUs to the right (below) of the preceding MTU.
• The last MTU (12 max.) connected to the FCI or ModuleBus Modem will have the TB807
Terminator installed in the ModuleBus connector.
• Set each MTU mechanical keys to the correct setting for the I/O module that will be
located there.
• The power supply modules may be located on the same DIN-rail as the FCI or ModuleBus
Modem and the I/O modules, but should be always located on a horizontal DIN-rail
because of its weight.
• Install an end stop before the first module and after the last one on the DIN-rail.
• Then proceed with the electrical connections as necessary.
Electric Installation
AF 100 Fieldbus Connection
The AF100 Fieldbus is connected to the terminals of a CI810 or a CI820. The incoming fieldbus
twisted pair cable is connected to a plug connector with four terminals, two for the signal wires
and two for the shield. The incoming and out going fieldbus signal + conductors are terminated
in the + terminal. The - conductors are both terminated in the - terminal. The cable shield drain
wires are terminated in the two SH terminals and they must be bridged to ensure a continuous
shield connection in case the fieldbus plug is removed from the FCI. Keep the drain wires as
short as possible (< 50mm). If the unit is at the end of the bus, a terminator (TK501Vxxx) must
be connected like the a cable would. Please refer to the Advant Fieldbus 100 User’s Guide for
complete details.
Profibus-DP Fieldbus Connection
The Profibus-DP fieldbus is connected to the terminals of a CI830. The incoming fieldbus cable
is connected to a 9 pin D-way connector. If the unit is at the end of the bus, a connector with
termination must be used. Please refer to the Profibus-DP Advant Controller 400 Series User’s
Guide for complete details.
I/O Clusters (1-7)
The TB820 ModuleBus Modem of an I/O cluster is connected to the CI810 FCI or TB815
Interconnection Unit by Optical Expansion cables. The optical ModuleBus can be a simplex,
duplex or mixed design.
• Optical cable length between each cluster must not exceed 15 meters with plastic fiber
cable and 200m with glass fiber cable.
• Refer to Section 3.1.3, TB820 ModuleBus Modem for optical ModuleBus configurations.
Distributed MTUs
The MTUs are joined to the I/O modules with plug-in connectors. An MTU can be extended to
another MTU by using a ModuleBus extension cable. The following instructions apply:
• Cable length and ModuleBus length must not exceed 2.5 meters.
• Cable routing in cabinets, see Section 2.2.3, Cable Routing in Enclosures.
Process Signals
Process signals are connected to the MTUs according to site installation drawings.
The following instructions also should apply:
• Cable routing in cabinets, see Section 2.2.3, Cable Routing in Enclosures.
• Grounding of cable shields and Process signals, see Section 2.2.2, Grounding.
A carefully done electrical installation is the basis for future interference-free operation.
Functional Measures
Address Jumpering
All S800 I/O modules are automatically set to the correct addresses by the ModuleBus
interconnection scheme.
The CI810 FCI module station address should be set to the assigned AF 100 station number set
by the station address switches. Refer to Section 1.7.1.1, CI810/CI810A Fieldbus
Communication Interface as to location of address switches.
The ModuleBus Modem cluster address should be set to the assigned cluster number by the
cluster address switch. Refer to Section 1.7.1.6, TB820 ModuleBus Modem.
CAUTION
Be aware of the risk of “accidents”. Short-circuit and over-voltage can damage
the equipment, for example, a process I/O board or field element.
2.2.6 Checklists
The following checklists, Table 2-3 to Table 2-11, are a summary of important information that
should be checked on the Advant Controller.
D.C. (grounded Connection Via d.c./d.c. converter if not connected to the same
battery) ground network as the S800. A battery grounded to
the same ground as the S800, unless the battery is
local
I/O Station Supply Max. power output < 90% of regulator capacity
Environmental
Standard Severity Level Test Class Test Signal Application
Phenomenon
Lightning IEC 1000-4-5 4kV CMV, 2kV NMV 4 1,2/50 - 8/20 us Power supply
2kV CMV, 1kV NMV 3 PI/O, Com.
Damped IEC 1000-4-12 1kV CMV, 0.5kV NMV 1 0,1; 1 MHz Power supply, PI/O. Com.
Oscillation
Emission EN 55022 A
2.2.6.10 Miscellaneous
Table 2-11. Miscellaneous
Thermocouples Position of AI835 CJC RTD should be placed where the TCs’
“CJC” RTD Cold compensation cable is terminated.
Junction
Compensation)
DANGER
Work with care when supply voltage is applied in the system. The voltage in
the cabinet can cause serious injury or death.
NOTE
Since the safety switch is a plant component this document can not stipulate and
describe the design exactly. Please check the plant documentation in this respect
carefully. Instructions, as to the extent of the power shut down, should preferably
be attached to the safety switch.
Regardless of the way, the results and consequences of a shut down will be:
– Zero output to the process devices (S800 I/O).
– De-energized output relays (S800 I/O).
– The system is ready for a restart. Restart can be performed when the reason for the
shut down is cleared away.
Manual Stop
Beyond the most drastic way of shut down, by disconnecting power, there is an other way to
“stop” the controller and the S800 I/O.
Stop program execution is obtained by the following method:
• Using the operator’s interface on the Advant Controller’s Processor Module front.
– Set mode selector in the STOP position.
– Push the ENTER button and the system will stop.
The results of the manual stop method:
– Zero output or OSP state to the process devices.
– De-energized or OSP state of output relays.
– The system is ready for a restart. Restart can be performed by placing the Mode
selector in the AUTO position, and pushing the ENTER button.
After necessary measures, a restart can take place.
DANGER
Work with care when supply voltage is applied in the system. The voltage in
the cabinet can cause serious injury or death.
Security Guidelines
During the power up of S800 I/O there is always a risk of spurious output signals to the process
due to a faulty hardware module.
Critical process devices should always be identified and isolated in some way if the process is
energized. Examples of different methods are:
• Disconnected output power supply.
• Disconnect the process cables from outputs.
• Remove output S800 I/O modules.
Succeeding operations after power up, including necessary tests, must be performed carefully.
The backup will be started up after the I/O. When the backup has started
PR “on” (only primary FCI in a redundant configuration)
DU “on” (both FCI in a redundant configuration)
Indications on I/O modules
F (fault): “on” at power up and “off” after the first access
from the FCI
R (run): “off” at power up and “on” for AI, DI after configuration and
for AO, DO after configuration and commanded operational
from the controller
W (warning): “off” at power up and after module operational
updated from the module
O (outputs only): “off” at power up and after module operational
updated from the module
With configuration but without communications with the controller:
See timing diagram Figure 2-78.
Indications on FCI
F (fault): “on” at power up and “off” after self-test ok
R (run): “off”
P (pow ok): “on” if power supply ok
T1: “off”
T2: “off”
PR “on” (only primary FCI in a redundant configuration)
DU “off” (both FCI in a redundant configuration)
Indications on I/O modules
F (fault): “on” at power up and “off” after the first access from
the FCI
R (run): “off” at power up and “on” for AI, DI after configuration from
the FCI. AO and DO remains in “off”
W (warning): “off” at power up and after module operational
updated from the module
O (osp only outputs): “off”
With configuration and communications with the controller:
See timing diagram Figure 2-79.
Indications on FCI
F (fault): “on” at power up and “off” after self-test ok
R (run): “off” at power up and “on” after configuration and
commanded operational from the controller.
(can take about 1 to 4 minutes)
P (pow ok): “on” if power supply ok
T1: “on” if cable 1 ok
T2: “on” if cable 2 ok
The backup will be started up after the I/O. When the backup has started
PR “on” (only primary FCI in a redundant configuration)
DU “on” (both FCI in a redundant configuration)
FCI
T1/T2
DU (both)
PR (primary)
PR (backup)
I/O module
OSP
Power up INIT in
S800 I/O FCI
T1
T2
PR (primary)
DU (both)
PR (backup)
R (backup)
I/O module
R (AI, DI)
R (AO, DO)
W (AI, DI)
Start of I/O
Power up INIT INIT
S800 I/O in FCI backup
FCI
T1/T2
DU (both)
PR (primary)
PR (backup)
I/O module
R (AI, DI)
R (AO, DO)
W (AI, DI)
W (AO, DO)
Start of I/O
Power up INIT
S800 I/O in FCI
Figure 2-78. Power-up Timing Diagram, With Configuration and No Communications to Controller
T1
T2
PR (primary)
DU (both)
PR (backup)
R (backup)
I/O module
R (AI, DI)
R (AO, DO)
W (AI, DI)
Start of I/O
Power up INIT INIT
S800 I/O in FCI backup
Figure 2-79. Power-up Timing Diagram, With Configuration and Communications to Controller
FCI
Primary
F
P
T1/T2
PR
DU
Backup
P
T1/T2
PR
DU
Power-up INIT
backup backup
Equipment Required
The following equipment is a minimum requirement:
• Necessary parts of the documentation listed in Section 1.3 Related Documentation.
• Specific documentation enclosed with the equipment.
In more complex installations which include closed loop control some additional test equipment
can be necessary/practical at tuning:
• Access to an operator station for loop tuning.
2.5.1 General
A general description of how to set the controller in operation and start the execution of
application program is presented in the Advant Controller manuals. Once the system is started
and ready for operation the I/O can be checked.
General information for some functional tests, which can be made to verify the S800 I/O are
presented in the following sections.
Input Signals
Figure 2-81 shows where an input signal can be checked in an S800 I/O application.
DI modules provide a field input connector and DI channel LED’s, and AI modules provide a
field input connector.
Operator Station
or
Advant Station Tool
MTU
FCI
Process Fieldbus
Input Data Base
Device Interface
Module
DI/AI ch.
Figure 2-81. Block Diagram of S800 I/O Input Channel, Test Points
Output Signals
Figure 2-82 shows where an output signal can be checked in an S800 I/O application.
DO Modules provide a field output connector and DO channel LED’s.
AO Modules provide a field output connector.
Operator Station
or
Advant Station Tool
FCI MTU
Fieldbus Process
Data Base Interface Output
Device
Module
DO/AO ch.
Figure 2-82. Block Diagram of S800 I/O Output Channel, Test Points
Chapter 3 Configuration
20 mm
22 mm (0.8”)
(0.86”)
Maximum 2.5 meters (98.4”)
162 mm
(6.4”)
806 mm (37.7”)
See Figure 3-2 for maximum layout of I/O cluster using Extended MTUs.
467.5 mm (18.4)
84 84 120.5
(3.3) 22 mm
(0.86)
162 mm
(6.37)
120.5
(4.74)
Bus Cable
Length = 300 mm
(11.8)
1550 mm
(61)
1126.5 mm
(44.4)
mm
(inches)
20
(0.8) 109 mm
(4.3)
An I/O cluster may be divided into smaller parts to fit a particular requirement, but the 2.5 meter
(8.2 feet) maximum must be observed at all times. The cluster may be distributed because of
space limitations or to keep signal types together. See Figure 3-3 for a example of an I/O cluster
divided up into four groups.
Terminator
TB807
Digital Inputs
Analog Inputs
TK801V0xx
Cable Adaptor, in
TB806
Analog Outputs Digital Outputs
The first unit of the I/O Station is the Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI). It connects to
the Advant Fieldbus 100 and is the communications interface to the I/O modules. The FCI
controls the ModuleBus and provides power to the logic-side of the I/O modules. The FCI is a
node on the Advant Fieldbus 100 and must be set to the correct address. Refer to Section
3.1.2.1, Address Switches for more information.
The FCI connects to the first MTU. Additional MTUs connect to each other or through the
ModuleBus Extension cable, up to a maximum of 12. The ModuleBus is terminated by the
TB807 Bus Terminator module. The I/O Modules are installed onto the MTUs and connected to
the process in the field.
Redundant FCIs
An I/O Station with redundant CI820 FCIs requires that the ModuleBus Extension cable be
connected to the TB815 Interconnection Unit and then to the first I/O Module. The maximum
ModuleBus length from the TB815 to the ModuleBus terminator is 2.5 meters. See Figure 3-4
for layout of a station.
Terminator
CI820 FCI TB807
TK801V0xx
TB815
Interconnection
Unit
Cable adaptor, in
TB806
I/O Clusters
I/O clusters 1-7 connect to the Optical ModuleBus port on the FCI or TB815 Interconnection
Unit by Optical Expansion cables. Each I/O station can have up to 24 I/O modules and each I/O
cluster can have up to 12 I/O modules. The 24V power supply has to be connected to each
cluster. See Figure 3-5 for an example of optical ModuleBus Expansion cabling.
F R
P
T1 T2
SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 56 Address
3 7 x 10
2 8 Switch #1
109 (Address 04
4 56
Address shown)
3 7x1
1) 2 8 Switch #2
CI810 109
SWX.X/Y
AF100 Tx Rx
L+ L+ SA 1 2
L- L- SB
+ + Tx
- -
SH SH
SH SH Rx
1) or CI810A
The CI820 also has two rotary switches used as station address selectors for Advant Fieldbus 100
connection. Both CI820s must have the same station address (in the range of 01 to 79) for
redundant operation. There can be up to 32 stations per Advant Fieldbus 100 twisted-pair section.
Figure 3-7 shows the front panel of the CI820.
F R
P
T1 T2
PR DU
STN. ADDR.
4 56 Address
3 7 x 10
2 8 Switch #1
109 (Address 04
4 56 shown)
3 7 x1 Address
CI820
2
109
8 Switch #2
L+ L+ SA AF100
L- L- SB
+
-
SH
SH
The CI830 is also equipped with two rotary switches used as station address selectors for
Profibus-DP connection. If the station address is not in the range of 01 to 99, the FCI enters the
error state. There can be up to 32 stations per Profibus-DP segment. Figure 3-8 shows the front
panel of the CI830.
F R
P
RX TX
PROFIBUS
SERVICE
STN. ADDR.
4 56 Address
3 7 x 10
2 8 Switch #1
109 (Address 04
5
4 6 shown)
3 7x1 Address
CI830
2
109
8 Switch #2
SWX.X/Y PROFIBUS Tx Rx
L+
Tx
L-
SA
SB Rx
4 56 1) or CI810A
1) 3 7x1
2 8
CI810 109
Channel 2
AF100 Tx Rx (X3)
L+ L+ SA 11 2
L- L- SB
FCI + + Tx
- -
SH SH
SH SH Rx
Terminal
Channel 1 Headers
(X2)
1
2
3
4 1
Fieldbus Cable #1 3
2
4
L+ L+ SA AF100 L+ L+ SA AF100
L- L- SB L- L- SB
+ Tx +
- -
SH SH
SH Rx SH
1
2
3 1
4 2
Fieldbus Cable #1 3
4
Fieldbus
Cable #2
TC512
TC 512
CI810 F R
P
T1 T2
P
CI522 Note: TX
RX
CI520 should be X4
CI520
connected with SDB X4
F R cable TK515/TK593
SERVICE STN. ADDR.
4 56
X3 + 3 7 x 10
2 8
- 109
X8 LDB
SH X3 3
4 56
7x1
SH CI810 2 8
109
Modem Cable X1
24V
1 L1+
2 L- X1 AF100 Tx Rx
L+ L+ SA 1 2
X2 L2+ L- L- SB
24V L- X2 + +
X9 TK803/TK804 1 2 3 - -
Tx
SH SH
Rx
1 2 3 SH SH
24V 24V
_ _ Tap Cable _ _
TC505
TC501V150
Termination + SH SH + + SH SH +
Unit TC501V150
+ SH SH + + SH SH +
GND S2 S1
4 m (13’) minimum
_ _
750 m (2450’) maximum _ _
S1 S2 GND
Ground connection
Trunk Cable at one end only
Figure 3-11. Typical Advant Fieldbus 100 Twisted Pair Segment Connections -
Single Cable Media
At the beginning and end of each Advant Fieldbus 100 twisted pair segment a TC501V150
Termination Unit is required. The bus cable must be grounded, but in one end only. This is done
by grounding the termination unit GND wire. Dual media requires the same termination
principles for each cable.
NOTE
For the main trunk cable, a twisted pair cable type (IBM Type 1) similar to Belden
number 9182 is recommended and for the local tap cable a double twisted pair
(2-pairs) cable (IBM Type 6A) similar to Belden number 1215A should be used.
For detail information about cables, please refer to the Advant Fieldbus 100
User’s Guide.
Figure 3-12 shows the connections for dual media to an I/O Station with redundant FCIs.
ABB TC 516
CI522
P RX F R F R
No.1 TX I TX II P
M
O
P
TC516 ST I ST II
PR
T1 T2
DU
D
U
L
T1
PR
T2
DU
E
B
CI522 U
S
CI52x
F R X4 I
Modem Cable
TK803/TK804 SERVICE SERVICE
X8 CI52x
X5 II
24V
L1+
X1
L- L+ L+ SA AF100 L+ L+ SA AF100
L- L- SB L- L- SB
L2+
X2 + +
L- Tx
- -
SH SH
SH Rx SH
24V 24V
Tap Cable
_ _
Tap Cable
TC505 _ _
_ _
+ SH SH + + SH SH +
+ SH SH +
TC505
TC501V150
+ SH SH + + SH SH +
+ SH SH +
GND S2 S1
_ _
4 m (13’) minimum _ _
S1 S2 GND
_ _
TC501V150
No.2 Ground connection
Termination
Unit at one end only
CI522 ABB TC 516
F R
P RX Trunk Cable
TX I TX II
TC516 ST I ST II
X8 CI52x
X4 I
CI52x
X5 II
X9
Modem Cable Tap Cable
TK803/TK804 +
- AF 100
X3
SH TWP
SH
1 L1+24V
X1
2 L-
_ _
L2+
X2
L-
Note: + SH SH +
Figure 3-12. Dual Twisted Pair Advant Fieldbus 100 Media to Redundant FCIs
Figure 3-13 illustrates the termination of the Advant Fieldbus 100 twisted pair cable. It shows
the termination in the first and the last stations. At the first station the terminator GND wire is
connected to ground. At the last station the terminator GND wire is not connected at all. It is
only the outermost, that is, the first and the last stations, on the bus segment that are terminated.
To first Tap
Station To last
Station IBM Type 6 Cable
Drain Wire (2 - pairs)
(shield)
< 50 mm
_ _ _ _
TC503 TC505 Connection Unit
Termination + SH SH + + SH SH +
Unit TC503
Termination
+ SH SH +
Unit
+ SH SH +
GND S2 S1
_ _ Trunk _ _
IBM Type 1 Cable S1 S2 GND
(1 - pair)
For detail information on designing the Advant Fieldbus 100, please refer to the Advant
Fieldbus 100 User’s Guide which describes the equipment and contains information required to
install and commission the system.
PROFIBUS Tx Rx
FCI L+
Tx
L-
SA
SB Rx
Profibus Cable
0
4 56
3 7 x1
2 8
CI810 109
TB810/TB811
AF100
Optical ModuleBus Port
Tx Rx
L+ L+ SA 1 2
L- L- SB
FCI
+ + Rx
- -
SH SH
SH SH Tx
The TB815 Interconnection Unit also connects the same way to the TB810/TB811 ports.
The connector style, either simplex or duplex, all provide snap-in action when mated to the
TB810/TB811 ports. Simplex connectors are color coded to facilitate identification of
transmitter (Tx) or receiver (Rx) connections. Duplex connectors are keyed so that proper
orientation is ensured during insertion.
NOTE
For simplex cables by convention, the gray connector is the transmitter end and
the blue connector is the receiver end.
4 56
3 7 x1
2 8
CI810 109
AF100
FCI L+ L+ SA 1 2
L- L- SB
+ + Tx
X1A - -
SH SH
X1B SH SH Rx
Terminal
Headers
3
2
Power Supply “A” 1
Monitor +24V d.c.
To MTUs
+24V d.c. 0V d.c. (I/O Modules)
3
2
1
From Power Supply
0V d.c.
Jumper
The power supply connections are the same for the CI810 and the CI820.
The incoming power can then be distributed to other FCIs or the I/O modules if desired. Refer
to Figure 3-22 and Figure 3-23 for power supply connection diagrams.
NOTE
If the distributed power needs to be independent of whether the power plugs are
removed or not, then the L+ and L- terminals should be bridged.
Power connections can accept up to 0.2 - 2.5 mm2 (24 - 14 AWG) wire size.
FCI power supply connections are presented in Table 3-4 and Table 3-5.
F R
P
ORx1 ORx2
ERx
CLUSTER
4 56
3 7 Cluster Address
2 Switch
1
(Address 4 shown)
TB820
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB
X4 X5
Rx Rx
Tx Tx
Optical ModuleBus
Interface Connector (X4, X5)
CAUTION
Care must be taken that no I/O clusters have the same address setting. This could
result in output modules in the same ModuleBus position but in different I/O
clusters putting out the same value.
NOTE
A new cluster address should not be set during operation. If the address changes
during operation the cluster is disconnected from the ModuleBus, and no
communications is possible with the I/O modules on that cluster address. The new
address is set at reset or power up.
TB820
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB Optical ModuleBus
Interface Connectors
X4 X5
Rx Rx (X4, X5)
Tx Tx
Rx
X4
Tx
Duplex Fiber Optic Cable Connector
Rx
X5
Tx
The connector style, either simplex or duplex, all provide snap-in action when mated to the
X4/X5 ports. Simplex connectors are color coded to facilitate identification of transmitter (Tx)
or receiver (Rx) connections. Duplex connectors are keyed so that proper orientation is ensured
during insertion.
Figure 3-19 shows a duplex, simplex and mixed configuration of the optical ModuleBus.
Duplex (two-way) is normally the best communication design, but may not apply to all
requirements. Duplex design allows additional TB820s to be added down-stream on-line.
Simplex (one-way) connections provide a ring configuration from the FCI to the first TB820, to
the next TB820 and etc. and then back to the FCI. Simplex designs will require that the “home-
run” cable from the last TB820 back to the FCI, or another TB820, be limited to the 15 meter
(49 ft.) plastic fiber or 200 meter (667 ft.) HCS fiber cable length. The 15 meter (49 ft.) cable
length or 200 meter (667 ft.) maximum applies from FCI to TB820, to TB820, etc. and back to
the FCI.
Also, duplex and simplex configurations can be mixed in the same optical ModuleBus if
required.
CI810/
CI810A Example of a “duplex” connection of the optical “ring”.
FCI
Rx Tx X4-Tx X4-Tx X4-Tx
X5-Rx TB820 TB820 TB820 TB820
X5-Rx X5-Rx X5-Rx
X4-Rx X4-Rx X4-Rx
X5-Tx
X5-Tx X5-Tx X5-Tx
CI810/
CI810A Example of a “simplex” connection of the optical ring.
FCI
Rx Tx
TB820 TB820 TB820 TB820
X5-Rx X4-Tx X4-Tx X4-Tx X4-Tx
X5-Rx X5-Rx X5-Rx
CI810/
CI810A Example of a mixed “simplex/duplex” connection of the optical “ring”.
FCI
Rx Tx
X4-Tx X4-Tx X4-Tx
X5-Rx TB820 TB820 TB820 TB820
X5-Rx X5-Rx X5-Rx
X4-Rx X4-Rx
X5-Tx
X5-Tx X5-Tx
In a “duplex connection” and in a “mixed connection” a cable break or loss of a TB820 will
only affect the clusters down-stream of the break. In a “simplex connection” a cable break or
loss of a TB820 will affect all I/O expansion clusters on the ModuleBus.
TB820
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB
X4 X5
X1B Rx Rx
Tx Tx
X1A
Terminal
Headers
3
2
Power Supply “A” 1
+24V d.c.
Monitor To MTUs
+24V d.c. 0V d.c. (I/O Modules)
3
2
1
From Power Supply
0V d.c.
Jumper
The incoming power can then be distributed to other TB820s or the I/O modules if desired.
Refer to Figure 3-22 and Figure 3-23 for power supply connection diagrams.
NOTE
If the distributed power needs to be independent of whether the power plugs are
removed or not, then the L+ and L- terminals should be bridged.
Power connections can accept up to 0.2 - 2.5 mm2 (24 - 14 AWG) wire size.
FCI power supply connections are presented in Table 3-6 and Table 3-7.
SD811
SD812
L1
L1
L2 (N)
L2 (N)
PE
PE
a.c. 110-240V
104VA a.c. 110-240V
207VA
DCOK
DCOK
DC Adj.
DC Adj.
+24V
2.5A +24V
0V 5A
0V
DCOK
DCOK
Figure 3-22 shows a typical wiring diagram for parallel operation when more capacity is
needed. Figure 3-23 shows a wiring diagram for redundant mains.
CI810/
CI810A
L+ L- SA SB
SD811/812
L L+ +
a.c. To MTUs
N L- - or Field
PE DCOK
24V
d.c.
SD811/812
L L+
a.c.
N L-
PE DCOK
24V
d.c.
CI810/
CI810A
L+ L- SA SB
Mains A SD811/812
L L+ +
a.c. To MTUs
N L- - or Field
PE DCOK
24V
d.c.
Mains B
SD811/812
L L+
a.c.
N L-
PE DCOK
24V
d.c.
SA
SB
SA
SB
L+
L+
L-
L-
Circuit
Breaker Fuse
SD811/812
or MCB
+24V
0V
PowOK Optional
Power to
field circuits
via MTUs
SD811/812
+24V
0V
PowOK
CI820
Diode
Voting
Unit
SA
SB
L+
L-
SD811/812
+24V
0V
PowOK
SD811/812
+24V
0V
PowOK
Figure 3-24. Connection Diagram for Redundant Power Supplies to Redundant FCIs
This power supply can be utilized for non-redundant and redundant applications and does not
require additional load-sharing control equipment such as diode voting units.
NOTE
Circuit breakers or a diode voting unit at the power supplies output are required if
hot replacement of supplies is required.
Connecting an MTU to the FCI or to another MTU automatically sets-up the address selection
of that MTU. There are no jumpers or switches that need to be set before installing an I/O
module.
MTUs are placed on the DIN rails and then connected to the preceding MTU or FCI. Once
connected, the MTU is locked in place by the bottom latch which also bonds it to the chassis
ground.
Guidelines
• A summary of the main requirements of the plant supply, from a planning point of view, is
found in Chapter 2, Installation, Section 2.1, Site Planning Environment.
• Auxiliary equipment in the controlled system is normally powered separately from the
S800 I/O power supplies.
• If field devices are grounded, be sure to use galvanic isolation.
• Heavy current on/off loads are always powered separately
• It is possible to use the system power supply for transmitters/transducers
– There is idle capacity in the available power supply units
– The transducer is grounded directly in the control system chassis
Number of Power Supply Units/Power Consumption
The I/O Station requires 24V d.c. @ 1 amp for the FCI and 12 I/O modules. Additional power
may be required for field devices.
NOTE
Spare MTUs need to be pre-mounted to add I/O modules on-line.
Table 3-9. % of Load on the Advant Fieldbus 100 by S800 I/O (up to 2000 m Bus Length)
AI810 25.2% 12.6% 6.3% 3.15% 1.575% 0.788% 0.394% 0.197% 0.098% 0.049% 0.025% 0.012% 0.006%
AI820 15.6% 7.8% 3.9% 1.95% 0.975% 0.488% 0.244% 0.122% 0.061% 0.03% 0.015% 0.008% 0.004%
AI830 25.3% 12.6% 6.3% 3.15% 1.575% 0.788% 0.394% 0.197% 0.098% 0.049% 0.025% 0.012% 0.006%
AI835
AO810 25.23% 12.63% 6.325% 3.175% 1.6% 0.812% 0.418% 0.221% 0.123% 0.074% 0.049% 0.037% 0.031%
AO820 15.62% 7.815% 3.915% 1.965% 0.99% 0.503% 0.259% 0.137% 0.076% 0.046% 0.03% 0.023% 0.019%
Table 3-9. % of Load on the Advant Fieldbus 100 by S800 I/O (up to 2000 m Bus Length) (Continued)
DP820(3) 15.6% 7.8% 3.9% 1.95% 0.975% 0.488% 0.244% 0.122% 0.061% 0.030% 0.015% 0.008% 0.004%
OUT-
SCANT
(1) FCI cycle time MOD 300.
(2) FCI cycle time Master.
(3) Total load = (load generated by INSCANT) + (load generated by OUTSCANT)
The total load if INSCANT is 32 ms and OUTSCANT is 64 ms is:
Total load = 0.788 + 0.244 = 1.032%.
The following example is for one I/O Station with: One CI810/CI810A (FCI), 2 AI810s,
2 AO810s, 4 DI810s and 4 DO810s using 128ms cycle times for the AI and AO modules; and
using 64ms cycle times for the DI and DO modules.
Example:
AF100%load = 0.033% + (2 x 0.197%AI810) + (2 x 0.221%AO810) + (4 x 0.138%DI810) +
(4 x 0.146%DO810) = 2.005% Load
Please refer to the Advant Fieldbus 100 User’s Guide for complete details of Advant
Fieldbus 100 load calculations and principals.
NOTE
AF 100%load must be equal to or less than 50%.
1 ms cycle time is not allowed.
Table 3-10. % of load on the Advant Fieldbus 100 by S800 I/O (8,500 m Bus Length)
AI820 11.80% 5.900% 2.950% 1.475% 0.738% 0.369% 0.184% 0.092% 0.046% 0.023% 0.012% 0.006%
AI830 16.60% 8.300% 4.150% 2.075% 1.038% 0.519% 0.259% 0.130% 0.065% 0.032% 0.016% 0.008%
AI835
AO810 16.63% 8.332% 4.182% 2.107% 1.070% 0.551% 0.292% 0.162% 0.097% 0.065% 0.049% 0.041%
AO820 11.82% 5.923% 2.973% 1.498% 0.761% 0.392% 0.207% 0.115% 0.069% 0.046% 0.035% 0.029%
DI810 8.40% 4.200% 2.100% 1.050% 0.525% 0.263% 0.131% 0.066% 0.033% 0.016% 0.008% 0.004%
DI811
DI814
DI820
DI821
DI830
DI831
DI885
DO810 8.416% 4.216% 2.116% 1.066% 0.541% 0.279% 0.148% 0.082% 0.049% 0.033% 0.025% 0.021%
DO814
DO815
DO820
DO821
DP820(3) 16.60% 8.300% 4.150% 2.075% 1.038% 0.519% 0.259% 0.130% 0.065% 0.032% 0.016% 0.008%
INSCANT
DP820(3) 11.80% 5.900% 2.950% 1.475% 0.738% 0.369% 0.184% 0.092% 0.046% 0.023% 0.012% 0.006%
OUT-
SCAN
(1) FCI cycle time MOD 300.
(2) FCI cycle time Master.
(3) Total load = (load generated by INSCANT) + (load generated by OUTSCANT)
The total load if INSCANT is 32 ms and OUTSCANT is 64 ms is:
Total load = 0.788 + 0.244 = 1.032%.
NOTE
AF 100%load must be equal to or less than 50%
1 ms cycle time is not allowed.
Table 3-11. % of Load on the Advant Fieldbus 100 by S800 I/O (15,000 m Bus Length)
AI820 15.80% 7.900% 3.950% 1.975% 0.988% 0.494% 0.247% 0.123% 0.062% 0.031% 0.015% 0.008%
AI830 20.60% 10.30% 5.150% 2.575% 1.288% 0.644% 0.322% 0.161% 0.080% 0.040% 0.020% 0.010%
AI835
AO810 20.64% 10.34% 5.190% 2.615% 1.328% 0.684% 0.362% 0.201% 0.121% 0.080% 0.060% 0.050%
AO820 15.83% 7.931% 3.981% 2.006% 1.018% 0.525% 0.278% 0.154% 0.093% 0.062% 0.046% 0.039%
DI810 12.40% 6.200% 3.100% 1.550% 0.775% 0.388% 0.194% 0.097% 0.048% 0.024% 0.012% 0.006%
DI811
DI814
DI820
DI821
DI830
DI831
DI885
DO810 12.42% 6.224% 3.124% 1.574% 0.799% 0.412% 0.218% 0.121% 0.073% 0.048% 0.036% 0.030%
DO814
DO815
DO820
DO821
DP820(3) 20.60% 10.30% 5.150% 2.575% 1.288% 0.644% 0.322% 0.161% 0.080% 0.040% 0.020% 0.010%
INSCANT
DP820(3) 15.80% 7.900% 3.950% 1.975% 0.988% 0.494% 0.247% 0.123% 0.062% 0.031% 0.015% 0.008%
OUT-
SCANT
(1) FCI cycle time MOD 300.
(2) FCI cycle time Master.
(3) Total load = (load generated by INSCANT) + (load generated by OUTSCANT)
The total load if INSCANT is 32 ms and OUTSCANT is 64 ms is:
Total load = 0.788 + 0.244 = 1.032%.
In the Advant Controller 400 Series, the data base is updated according to selected
SCANT-value (10 ms to 6 s).
AI820 20
AI830 12
AI835 12
AO810 13
AO820 21
In order to find out if a given configuration of analog and digital modules can be used the
following method should be used:
• Fill in number of modules in table Table 3-13.
• Calculate the sum in the three columns:
– Sum User Parameters
– Sum Input Bytes
– Sum Output Bytes
• Calculate the three total sums for:
– ParamSize
– InSize
– OutSize
• Check that:
– ParamSize is less than or equal to 237
– InSize is less than or equal to 244
– OutSize is less than or equal to 244244
If any of these three values is too high then the configuration can not be used.
• Round up the values to the nearest multiple of eight (8), for example, 233 is rounded
to 240.
• Finally calculate the memory size with the formula:
MemSize = 672 + 2x(8 + RoundParamSize) + 3x(RoundInSize + RoundOutSize)
NOTE
Check that MemSize is less than or equal to 2048. If not, the configuration can
not be used.
AI810 11 20 4
AI820 7 12 4
AI830 11 20 4
AI835 13 20 4
AO810 16 4 18
AO820 10 4 10
DI810 4 6 4
DI811 4 6 4
DI814 4 6 4
DI820 4 6 2
DI821 4 6 2
DO810 8 4 4
DO814 8 4 4
DO820 6 4 4
Totalize the number of module type x * used execution time for type x (see Table 3-14) increase
total value to the nearest higher multiple of 2 to get the I/O scan cycle time.
AI810, AI820 and AO810 and AO820 modules will be scanned every fourth I/O scan cycle
time.
AI830 and AI835 modules will be scanned every tenth I/O scan cycle time.
DI and DO modules will be scanned each I/O scan cycle time.
For example, a non redundant station with 2 AI810, 1 AO810, 2 DI810, 2 DO820 and 1 AI830
will give the following I/O scan cycle time:
2 AI810 => 2*3.00 = 6.00
1 AO810 => 1*1.20 = 1.20
2 DI810 => 2*0.43 = 0.86
2 DO810 => 2*0.43 = 0.86
1 AI830 => 1*0.40 = 0.40
1 CI810 => 1*1.40 = 1.40
-----------------------------------------
10.72 + (nearest higher value dividable by 2) = 12 ms
That will give an I/O scan cycle time of 12 ms between the FCI and its I/O modules. This means
that the DIs and DOs will be scanned every 12 ms, the AI810s and the AO810 every
(4*12 ms) 48 ms and the AI830 every (10*12 ms) 120 ms.
NOTE
Minimum I/O scan cycle time = 4 ms single FCI.
Minimum I/O scan cycle time = 6 ms redundant FCI.
NOTE
The above estimates are based on an I/O Station with a mixed configuration of
AI/AO and DI/DO. Only power consumption on the 24V d.c. distributed via the
ModuleBus are included. External 24V connected directly to the I/O modules, for
external loads and transmitters, are not included. When using large quantities of
AO820s and/or DO820s, these load figures may be exceeded.
Power
5 Volts 24 Volts 24 Volts Cooling Load (1) Maximum Ambient
Device Dissipation
ModuleBus ModuleBus External (BTU/H Typical) Temperature
(Watts)
AI810 70 mA 40 mA - 1.5 5.1 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
Power
5 Volts 24 Volts 24 Volts Cooling Load (1) Maximum Ambient
Device Dissipation
ModuleBus ModuleBus External (BTU/H Typical) Temperature
(Watts)
DI820 50 mA - - 2.8 9.6 55/40°C (131/104°F)(2)
SD811 - - 11 37 55°C/(131°F)(7)
SD812 - - 22 75 55°C/(131°F)(7)
(1) Cooling load is the heat (BTU/H) produced by the equipment that may be required to meet room or enclosure cooling specifications.
(2) 40°C (104°F) applies to Compact MTUs with I/O modules mounted on a vertical DIN rail.
(3) 24V from ModuleBus (91 mA) or 24V external (91 mA) or 48V external (22 mA).
(4) 500 mA per channel with maximum load per channel.
(5) 2A per channel with maximum load per channel.
(6) CI820 in redundant configuration 2 x 250 mA
(7) Horizontal mounting only.
3. 3 and 6
Cycle times for transfer of input and
6. output values on AF 100 are configured
in the Advant Controller
Fieldbus Communication
Interface (FCI)
Dual Port Memory
Input Module Output Module
2 and 7
Input and output values are updated 2. Chan x Chan x
as fast as possible (depends on the
configuration). Signal conditioning is 7. Values Values
also performed in this loop. 8.
1.
1 and 8
Input and output values are updated
“as fast as possible” (depends on the
S800 I/O module configuration)
Process
Figure 4-1. Dynamic Data Exchange for Advant Fieldbus 100 in Runtime
The transportation of dynamic data between the Advant Fieldbus 100 and the ModuleBus is the
main task for the FCI. The FCI has a dedicated memory area where it sends the output values
and reads the input values. The CPU in the FCI performs the rest of the data transportation. It
reads output values from the memory and writes to the I/O Modules via the ModuleBus and vice
versa.
Profibus-DP
3. 3 and 4
Data exchange with Profibus-DP is
4. cyclic and consists of both writing of
data from Master to FCI as well as data
read from FCI to Master.
Fieldbus Communication
Interface (FCI)
Communication Memory
Input Module Output Module
2 and 5
Input and output values are updated 2. Chan x Chan x
as fast as possible (depends on the
configuration). Signal conditioning is 5. Values Values
also performed in this loop. 6.
1.
1 and 6
Input and output values are updated
“as fast as possible” (depends on the
S800 I/O module configuration).
Process
The transportation of dynamic data between Profibus-DP and the ModuleBus is the main task
for the FCI. The FCI has a dedicated memory area where it sends the output values and reads
the input values. The CPU in the FCI performs the rest of the data transportation. It reads output
values from the memory and writes to the I/O Modules via the ModuleBus and vice versa.
Init
Error
Not
Configured
From all other states:
Fatal error detected by module
Parameter loaded
Commanded to
not configured Ready
state
Init State
In the Init state the actual initialization of the module is performed, including a self-test.
Inputs: Not scanned
Outputs: Inactive: 0V
LEDs: Fault
Ready State
Entering the Ready state starts input channel scanning. All active channels are scanned before
the state is completely entered. In this state the module just waits to be commanded to the
Operational state.
Inputs: Scanned
Outputs: Inactive: 0V
LEDs: None (or Warning if diagnostic warning)
Operational State
This is the state for normal operation. After entering the Operational state (from Ready or OSP),
output channels are still unchanged until a valid output value is written.
Inputs: Scanned
Outputs: Active
LEDs: Run (and Warning if diagnostic warning)
Error State
This the state that will be entered if a fault is detected.
Inputs: Not Scanned
Outputs: Inactive (0V)
LEDs: Fault
Loading Parameters
At start-up, the configuration parameters are loaded by the FCI in the Not Configured state.
When valid configuration parameters are written to the module, it will change from the Not
Configured state to the Ready state. After entering the Ready state the module may be set to
Operational.
A parameter block that is not loaded is undefined (there is no such thing as default parameters).
The only property that may be seen as a default, is that a channel that is not configured (has not
gotten its parameters) is inactive. This makes it possible to configure only channels that should
be used without bothering about the others.
The parameters do not need to be remembered on the modules after a reset of the module.
Non-volatile Parameters
Each channel may, apart from the configuration parameters, also have non-volatile parameters
that are written during production and are not changed by a running system.
Module Status
Each module has a status that summarizes the status for the whole module. It contains
information about its working state and if any non-fatal or fatal error is detected. The status
information can be read and evaluated by the Advant Controller cyclically.
Init
Error
Not
Configured
From all other states:
Fatal error detected by module
Parameter loaded
Commanded to
Not Configured Ready
state
Init State
In the Init state the actual initialization of the module is performed, including a self-test.
Inputs: Not scanned
Outputs: Inactive: 0V
LEDs: Fault
Ready State
Entering the Ready state starts input channel scanning. All active channels are scanned before
the state is completely entered. In this state the module just waits to be commanded to the
Operational state.
Inputs: Scanned
Outputs: Inactive: 0V
LEDs: None (or Warning if diagnostic warning)
Operational State
This is the state for normal operation. After entering the Operational state (from Ready or OSP),
output channels are still unchanged until a valid output value is written.
Inputs: Scanned
Outputs: Active
LEDs: Run (and Warning if diagnostic warning)
After re-entering the Operational state, the outputs are still unchanged until valid values are
written.
Inputs: Not applicable
Outputs: According to configuration (keep value or OSP value)
LEDs: Run, OSP (and Warning if diagnostic warning)
Error State
This the state that will be entered if a fault is detected.
Inputs: Not scanned
Outputs: Inactive (0V)
LEDs: Fault
Loading Parameters
At start-up, the configuration parameters are loaded by the FCI in the NotConfigured state.
When valid configuration parameters are written to the module, it will change from the Not
Configured state to the Ready state. After entering the Ready state the module may be set to
Operational.
The parameters do not need to be remembered on the modules after a reset of the module since
they are saved in the FCI.
Non-volatile Parameters
Each channel may, apart from the configuration parameters, also have non-volatile parameters
that are written during production and are not changed by a running system.
Module Status
Each module has a status that summarizes the status for the whole module. It contains
information about its working state and if any non-fatal or fatal error is detected. The status
information can be read by the Profibus-DP Master cyclically.
Chapter 5 Maintenance
Safety
Check that all screwed joints and connections within the cabinets are tightened effectively.
Ensure that wiring, modules and other electrical components are undamaged. Pay particular
attention to overheating, damaged insulation or signs of wear.
Cleanliness
Remove dust and other fouling from the cabinet with compressed air or a vacuum cleaner. Use a
lint-free cloth, dampened with methylated spirits to remove stubborn fouling.
5.2.1 Color
A fixed meaning is assigned to the colors red, yellow and green:
RED: Danger or alarm Warning of potential danger or a situation which requires
immediate action
YELLOW: Caution Change or impending change of condition
GREEN: Safety Indication of a safe situation or authorization to proceed,
clear way.
For digital I/O on-states a definite meaning can not be assigned. For them the color yellow is
chosen. The Table 5-1 shows the meaning and colors of LED's.
5.2.2 Location
For the location of LEDs the following rules are applied:
• Indications having the same meaning on every I/O module (for example, FAULT, RUN,
WARNING, OSP) are at the same position.
• The standard indications FAULT, RUN, WARNING and OSP (only output modules), are
always on the topmost position on every device (top: FAULT, RUN, then WARNING,
OSP).
• On the FCI: FAULT, RUN, POWER OK, TRAFFIC and for redundant FCI also
PRIMARY and REDUNDANCY OK.
5.2.3 Identification
LED's shall be identified by an appropriate symbol or abbreviation of an English term. For the
standard indications the abbreviation is as follows:
• Fault in the module FAULT or F
• Device is in operation RUN or R
• External fault or minor fault in the module WARNING or W
• Output Set as Predetermined, OSP or O
• Digital I/O on-state 1, 2,... (channel number)
• Power supply ok internal and/or external ok POWER OK or P
F R
P
T1 T2
LED Status
SERVICE Indicators
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7 x 10
2 8
109
4 56
3 7 x1
1) 2 8
CI810 109
SWX.X/Y TB810/TB811
AF100 Tx Rx
L+ L+ SA 1 2
L- L- SB
+ + Tx
- -
SH SH
SH SH Rx
1) or CI810A
F R
P
T1 T2
PR DU
LED Status
Indicators
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7 x 10
2 8
109
4 56
3 7 x1
2 8
CI820 109
SWX.X/Y
L+ L+ SA AF100
L- L- SB
+
-
SH
SH
F R
P
RX TX
PROFIBUS
LED Status
SERVICE Indicators
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7 x 10
2 8
109
5
4 6
3 7x1
2 8
CI830 109
SWX.X/Y TB810/TB811
PROFIBUS Tx Rx
L+
L- Tx
SA
SB Rx
LED Status
F R Indicators
P
ORx1 ORx2
ERx
CLUSTER
4 56
3 7
2
1
TB820
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB
X4 X5
Rx Rx
Tx Tx
Each digital channel has one LED indicating current state (on/off).
Normally when an I/O module has been removed from the configuration, the FCI will do a
restart of the module. The module will end up in the NOT CONFIGURED mode.
F F F F F
R R R R R
W W W W W
O O O
1 1 PX1
2 2 UP1
3 3 ST1
4 4 DI1
5 5 SY1
6 6 DO1
7 7 TP1
8 8 UL1
9 9 PX2
10 10 UP2
11 11 ST2
12 12 DI2
13 13 SY2
14 14 DO2
15 15
16 16 TP2
UL2
5.3.1 Introduction
Diagnostics are available in different forms for rapid localization of the source of the equipment
malfunction. Hardware error is usually corrected by replacing the faulty module which is
returned to ABB Service for repairs. The smallest replaceable unit is normally a module or an
apparatus like a power supply unit.
Disturbances and system halt caused by software error is commonly solved by a manual system
restart.
External faults in process wiring and transducers can also affect the function of the S800 I/O
system. However, this type of fault is not discussed in this manual.
Operator Station
If the controller is included in a control network with an Advant Operator Station the following
facilities apply.
• System diagnostic messages:
– Give information about probable cause of malfunction in coded form or plain
language.
• System status displays:
– Showing fatal and non-fatal error in the I/O system.
Process Control
Certain controller faults, for example, those related to S800 I/O module channels, will probably
be detected indirectly when a control function goes wrong. For some S800 I/O module types
there is limited system diagnostics support on a channel level.
To minimize the down time, it is important that the operator has a good overview and
knowledge of the plant functions.
It is also essential that the control system design, besides the normal control functions, include
supervision of important process objects and their system inputs and outputs as well.
WARNING
A restart of the Advant Controller can have very serious consequences. It is
important to be aware of the local requirements for safety when starting and
stopping the Advant Controller.
General
All I/O modules can be exchanged on-line an with the process power supply connected. This is
possible because the module deactivates when the I/O module lock switch is turned to unlock.
It is important to understand the consequences of a module exchange on-line and how it affects
the process. Replacement of an S800 I/O module affects all channels on the module. It also
sometimes indirectly affects the outputs via some application function, on another module.
The system software in the FCI checks automatically that all I/O modules function correctly. In
the event of module fault, and module exchange, the module and associated signals are marked
as faulty. While the fault marking is present, the value is not updated in the data base.
The system software checks that the module is inserted and correct. If this is the case, the
Fault-indicator (LED) extinguishes (after 10 seconds), the fault marking in the data base is reset
and the module resumes its normal function.
The following headings include general instructions for replacement of modules and aspects on
the handling of individual modules are presented in Table 5-8.
Practical Execution
Replace faulty or suspect I/O modules in the following way:
1. Read Section 2.2.1, Safety Regulations.
2. Special restrictions apply to each module type. See descriptions in Table 5-8 for useful
information on individual module types.
3. Check that the new module can replace the old.
4. Provide access to the module by loosening the module locking.
5. Grip the module firmly and extract the module.
6. Insert the new module carefully.
7. Store extracted modules in envelopes.
8. Ensure that the module contacts mate properly with the contacts in the MTU and activate
the locking mechanism in place.
9. Modules initialized automatically by the system and the fault indicating LED extinguishes
automatically after approximately 10 seconds.
10. Perform a function test on the new module.
General
In single or parallel operation of power supplies, there will always be a disturbance of the
function when a power supply must be replaced; the station will not have power.
In a redundant power supply configuration, it is be possible to replace a power supply module
without disturbance of the function. To achieve that the installation see Section 3.1.4, SD811
and SD812 Power Supply Configurations and the correct replacement procedure that follows.
Practical Execution
Replace faulty or suspect power supply module in the following way:
For single or parallel operation do steps 1, 2 and 4 to13.
For redundant configuration do steps 1 to 14.
1. Read Section 2.2.1, Safety Regulations.
2. Check that the new module can replace the old.
3. Switch off the output from the module (only redundant configuration).
4. Switch off input power to the module.
5. Disconnect the wires.
6. Unmount the module by loosening the module locking.
7. Mount the new module.
8. Connect the input wires.
9. Switch on input power to the module.
10. Perform a function test on the new module.
11. Switch off input power to the module.
12. Connect the output wires.
13. Switch on input power to the module.
14. Switch on the output from the module (only redundant configuration).
General
Normally communications modules can’t be exchanged on-line, the only exception is the CI820
in a redundant configuration.
It is important to understand the consequences of a module exchange and how it affects the
process.
• Replacement of a communication module type CI810/CI810A/CI830 or a CI820 in a
single configuration affects all channels on all the modules in an I/O station. The station
will loose power.
• Replacement of a single communication module type CI820 in a redundant configuration
has no affects on channels in an I/O station.
• Replacement of a communication module type TB810/TB811 affects all channels on all
the modules in all clusters except cluster 0. The communication will be broken to all
clusters except for cluster 0.
• Replacement of a communication module type TB815 affects all channels on all the
modules in an I/O station. The station will loose power.
• Replacement of a communication module type TB820, connected via a simplex optical
cable, affects all channels on all the modules in all clusters except cluster 0. The
communication will be broken to all clusters except for cluster 0. The cluster where the
TB820 should be replaced will be power less.
• Replacement of a communication module type TB820, connected via a duplex optical
cable, affects all channels on all the modules in all clusters after and including the cluster
where the replaced TB820 is located. The communication will be broken to all clusters
after where the replaced TB820 is located. The cluster where TB820 should be replaced
will be power less.
The following headings include general instructions for replacement of modules and aspects on
the handling of individual modules are presented in Table 5-9.
Practical Execution
Replace faulty or suspect communication modules in the following way:
1. Read Section 2.2.1, Safety Regulations.
2. Special restrictions apply to each module type. See descriptions in Table 5-9 for useful
information on individual module types.
3. Check that the new module can replace the old for CI810/CI810A, CI820 and CI830, also
check the software version. If the wrong software version is found, then load new
software; see Section 5.3.5, Field Upgrade of CI810/CI810A/CI820/CI830 Basic Software
4. Disconnect the power supply/supplies from the module (both CI820s if TB815).
5. Disconnect the Advant Fieldbus 100/Profibus-DP and ModuleBus cables from the
module.
6. Extract the module.
7. Set the current Station address or Cluster address on the new module
8. Insert the new module carefully.
9. Connect the Advant Fieldbus 100/Profibus-DP and ModuleBus cables to the module.
10. Connect the power supply/supplies to the module.
11. Store extracted modules in protective envelopes.
12. Modules are initialized automatically by the system and it will takes approximately
60 seconds for a CI810/CI810A/CI820/CI830 to start up.
1 0 9
7
8
x1 Switches Optical ModuleBus port for TB810/TB811 can be
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB 1
AF100
2
Tx Rx
removed by pulling the connector(s) out of the
+
-
SH SH
+
-
Rx
Tx
unit.
SH SH
3
2
4 56
10 9
7
8
x 10
Station Address
removed by pulling the header terminals out of
CI820
3
2
4 56
10 9
7 x1
8 Switches the unit.
L+ L+ SA
L- L- SB
AF100 Fieldbus connections can be removed by pulling
the header terminals out of the unit.
+
-
SH
SH
CI830 Switch setting for Profibus-DP address Can not be replaced with power applied.
FCI Needs room to the left in order to be removed.
F R
In normal operation mode, before a CI830 is
P
RX
PROFIBUS
TX
replaced, the supply to the S800 I/O is to be
switched off. Power connections can be
removed by pulling the header terminals out of
SERVICE STN. ADDR.
4 56
the unit.
3
2
1 0 9
7 x 10
8 Station Address
CI830
3
2
4 56
1 0 9
7 x1
8
Switches Optical ModuleBus port for TB810/TB811 can be
L+
PROFIBUS Tx Rx
removed by pulling the connector(s) out of the
L-
SA
SB Rx
Tx
unit.
Fieldbus connections can be removed by pulling
the D-way connector out of the unit.
Modem ERx
removed.
In normal operation mode, before a TB820 is
CLUSTER
3
4 56
7
Cluster Address replaced, the supply to the S800 I/O is to be
Switch
2
TB820
1
the unit.
Optical ModuleBus connections can be removed
by pulling the connector(s) out of the unit.
Hardware Required
• PC with WINDOWS 3.1x
• Connection cable TK527
PC CI810/CI810A
CI820 or
CI830 (TB815)
COM1 RS232
Procedure
1. Switch the power off at CI810/CI810A.
2. Set up an invalid Advant Fieldbus 100 address (90-99) at CI810/CI810A address switch.
3. Disconnects the Advant Fieldbus 100 cable.
4. Switch power on at CI810/CI810A and wait 45 seconds.
5. Switch the power off at CI810/CI810A.
6. Set the Station address on CI810/CI810A to a valid address (1 - 79).
7. Switch power on at CI810/CI810A and wait 45 seconds.
8. Connect the PC and the CI810/CI810A, using a TK527 cable between the RS232 service
port on the CI810/CI810A and the COM1 port of the PC.
9. Start WINDOWS on the PC.
10. Select <Run . . . > in the program manager’s <File> menu.
11. Type a:\setup_c1.pif
*If you are using drive b, type b:\setup.....
*If the serial port you are using is COM2, type a:\setup_c2.pif
12. You are asked:
‘CAUTION: Loading BASE software will stop all applications!
‘OK to load (Y/N) ?
Enter Y<CR>
13. Loading (takes about 10 minutes).
14. Press any Key (to finish).
F R
P
T1 T2
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7
x 10
2 8
1 0 9
4 56
3 7
1) x1
2 8 1) or CI810A
CI810 1 0 9
Label
Software SW*1.1/0 AF100
Version L+ L+ SA 1 2
L- L- SB
+ +
- -
SH SH
SH SH
Procedure
To be able to load both CI820’s with new software without disturbance Advant Fieldbus 100
must be working on both AF 100 cables.
To be able to load one of the CI820’s with new software without distrubance the Advant
Fieldbus 100 cable must be connected to the other CI820, and the AF 100 must be working.
It is assumed that the PC communication port is COM1: and the diskette drive is A.
Load of the backup CI820
1. Connect the PC and the CI820 in backup state, using a TK527 cable between the
appropriate RS232 service port on the TB815 and the COM1 port of the PC.
2. Start WINDOWS on the PC.
3. Select <Run . . . > in the program manager’s <File> menu.
4. Type a:\setup_c1.pif
*If you are using drive b, type b:\setup....
*If the serial port you are using is COM2, type a:\setup _c2.pif
5. You are asked:
‘CAUTION: Loading BASE software will stop all applications!
‘OK to load (Y/N) ?
Enter Y<CR>
6. The backup CI820 will go to Fault state.
7. Power off/on on the backup CI820.
8. Loading (takes about 10 minutes).
9. Press any Key (to finish).
10. Put the largest label on the back of the CI820 and the smaller one on the front of CI820
according to Figure 5-8.
Load of the Primary CI820
1. Before loading start, be sure that the backup is up running (LED DU is on).
2. The best way is to make a commanded switch over first and then load the CI820 as
backup.
3. If it is impossible to make a commanded switch over, load the CI820 according to the
instruction above for Load of the backup CI820.
4. Put the largest label on the back of the CI820 and the smaller one on the front of CI820
according to Figure 5-8.
F R
P
T1 T2
PR DU
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7 x 10
2 8
109
4 56
3 7x1
2 8
CI820 109
Label
SW*2.0/0
Software
L+ L+ SA AF100
Version L- L- SB
+
-
SH
SH
Procedure
• Switch the power off at CI830
• Set up an invalid station address (90-99) at CI830 address switch
• Disconnects the Profibus-DP cable
• Switch power on at CI830 and wait 45 seconds
• Switch the power off at CI830
• Set the Station address on CI830 to a valid address (1 - 79)
• Switch power on at CI830 and wait 45 seconds
• Connect the PC and the CI830, using a TK527 cable between the RS232 service port on
the CI830 and the COM1 port of the PC.
• Start WINDOWS on the PC.
• Select <Run . . . > in the program manager’s <File> menu.
• Type a:\setup_c1.pif
*If you are using drive b, type b:\setup.....
*If the serial port you are using is COM2, type a:\setup_c2.pif
• You are asked:
‘CAUTION: Loading BASE software will stop all applications!
‘OK to load (Y/N) ?
Enter Y<CR>
• Loading (takes about 10 minutes).
• Press any Key (to finish).
F R
P
RX Tx
PROFIBUS
STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7
x 10
2 8
1 09
5
4 6
3 7
x1
2 8
CI830 1 09
L+
L-
SA
SB
Features
• 8 channels for 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, 0...10V
or 2...10V d.c., single ended unipolar inputs
• 1 group of 8 channels isolated from ground
F
• 12 Bit resolution
R
• Input shunt resistors protected to 30V by PTC resistor W
• Analog inputs are short circuit secured to ZP or +24V
• EMC protection 1
• DIN rail mounting
2
Description
The AI810 Analog Input Module has 8 channels. Each 3
channel can be either a voltage or current input.
The current input is able to handle a short circuit to the 4
transmitter supply at least 30V d.c without damage. Current
limiting is performed with a PTC resistor. The input 5
resistance of the current input is 250 ohm, PTC included.
The voltage input is able to withstand an over or 6
undervoltage of at least 30V d.c. Input resistance is
290k ohm. The EMC protection is placed on the module.
7
Transmitter supply can be connected to L1+, L1- and/or L2+,
L2-. 8
The module distributes the external transmitter supply to
each channel. This adds a simple connection to distribute the AI810
supply to 2- or 3-wire transmitters. There are no current 0..20 mA, 0..10V
limiting on the transmitter power terminals. Fused MTUs
TU830 and TU835 provides groupwise and channelwise
fusing.
All eight channels are isolated from the ModuleBus in one
group. Power to the input stages is converted from the 24V
on the ModuleBus.
Description (continued)
Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). The RUN LED indicates normal
operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in
Init state or Not configured state. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid access to the
module.
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
Five different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices
without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 24V process voltage inputs, but
requires external terminals for distribution of 24V power supply to the field devices. The extended MTU, TU835,
provides a fuse (3A max.) per channel for process power out. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male)
connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-1. AI810 Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C
AI810
Feature
Analog Input Module
Number of channels 8
Resolution 12 bit
Current consumption 5V 70 mA
AI810
Feature
Analog Input Module
Voltage supervision Internal process supply
FAULT
RUN
WARNING
L1+
ZP
L1+ Pos
I1U
I1I LP
ZP Block
L1+
I4U Mux FCI
I4I LP
ZP #
5VS
5V
0V
L2+ Power_ok
I5U
I5I LP
ZP
+UPInt +24V
ZP
L2+ -UPInt 0V24V
I8U
I8I LP
ZP
L2+
ZP
EM
Process Connections
Table A-2. AI810 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
TU830 TU835
Process Connection (or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Terminal Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2) L1+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2) L1- (2)
Ch1, L1+ - - B1, B2 11 (F1)
Ch1, Voltage Input C1 3 C1 -
Ch1, Current Input B1 16 C2 12
Ch1, Return (ZP) A1 - A1, A2 -
Ch 2, L1+ - - B3, B4 21 (F2)
Ch 2, Voltage Input C2 4 C3 -
Ch 2, Current Input B2 17 C4 22
Ch 2, Return (ZP) A2 - A3, A4 -
Ch 3, L1+ - - B5, B6 31 (F3)
Ch 3, Voltage Input C3 5 C5 -
Ch 3, Current Input B3 18 C6 32
Ch 3, Return (ZP) A3 - A5, A6 -
Ch 4, L1+ - - B7, B8 41 (F4)
Ch 4, Voltage Input C4 6 C7 -
Ch 4, Current Input B4 19 C8 42
Ch 4, Return (ZP) A4 - A7, A8 -
Ch 5, L2+ - - B9, B10 51 (F5)
Ch 5, Voltage Input C5 7 C9 -
Ch 5, Current Input B5 20 C10 52
Ch 5, Return (ZP) A5 - A9, A10 -
Ch 6, L2+ - - B11, B12 61 (F6)
Ch 6, Voltage Input C6 8 C11 -
Ch 6, Current Input B6 21 C12 62
Ch 6, Return (ZP) A6 - A11, A12 -
Ch 7, L2+ - - B13, B14 71 (F7)
Ch 7, Voltage Input C7 9 C13 -
Ch 7, Current Input B7 22 C14 72
Ch 7, Return (ZP) A7 - A13, A14 -
Ch 8, L2+ - - B15, B16 81 (F8)
Ch 8, Voltage Input C8 10 C15 -
Ch 8, Current Input B8 23 C16 82
Ch 8, Return (ZP) A8 - A15, A16 -
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2) L2+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2) L2- (2)
(1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM.
A.2 AI820 Differential Analog Input Module, +/- 20 mA, +/- 10V, +/- 5V
Features
• 4 channels for -20...+20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA,
-10...+10V, 0...10V, 2...10V, -5...+5V, 0...5V, 1...5V d.c.
bipolar differential inputs
• One group of 8 channels isolated from ground F
R
• Configurable on a per channel basis
W
• 14 Bit resolution plus sign
• Input shunt resistors protected to 30Vd.c. 1
• EMC protection
• DIN rail mounting
Description 2
The AI820 Analog Input Module has 4 differential, bipolar
current/voltage inputs. Each channel can be either a voltage
or current input.
The current inputs can withstand an accidental maximum 3
normal mode 30V d.c. connection. To protect the current
input circuit against dangerous input levels, that is, by
accidentally connecting a 24V source, the resistor rating of
the 250Ω current sense resistors is about 5 Watts. This is
4
intended only to temporarily protect one channel at a time.
The module distributes the external transmitter supply to
each channel. This adds a simple connection (with
extended MTUs) to distribute the supply to external 2 wire
transmitters. There is no current limiting on the transmitter AI820
power terminals. ±20 mA, ±10V Diff
All 4 channels are isolated from the ModuleBus in one
group. Power to the input stages is converted from the 24V
on the ModuleBus.
(continued on next page)
Description (continued)
Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). The RUN LED indicates normal
operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any diagnostic condition is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the
module is in Init state or Not configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid
access to the module.
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices
without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 24V process voltage inputs, but
requires external terminals for distribution of 24V power supply to the field devices. The TU812 Compact MTU has a
D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-3. AI820 Differential Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C
AI820
Feature
Analog Input Module
Number of channels 4
Input impedance (at voltage input) 200kΩ +/− 25% Common mode
800kΩ +/− 25% Normal mode
NMRR, 50 Hz, 60 Hz 33 dB
Table A-3. AI820 Differential Analog Input Module Specifications at 25°C (Continued)
AI820
Feature
Analog Input Module
Current consumption 5V 80 mA
FAULT
RUN
WARNING
L1+
L1-
L1+
L1- Pos
I1U+
I1IB AMP
+ Block
I1I+
LPF
ModuleBus
I1- PGA CLK +/-
Mux
G=1/2 MBI-2
Data +/-
L1+ #
L1-
5VS
I2U+ CPU 5V
I2IB AMP
+ 0V
I2I+
LPF
I2- Power_ok
I3U+ +24V
+UPInt
I3IB AMP ZP
+ +0V24
I3I+ -UPInt
LPF
I3-
L2+
L2-
I4U+
I4IB AMP
I4I+ +
LPF
I4-
L2+
L2-
L2+
L2-
ZP
EM
Process Connections
Table A-4. AI820 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
TU830
Process Connection (or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Terminal
Terminal Connector(1)
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
Ch1, L1+ - - B1, B2
Ch1, Voltage Input + C1 3 C1
Ch1, Current Bridge B1 16 C2
Ch1, L1- A1 - A1, A2
Ch 1, L1+ - - B3, B4
Ch 1, Current Input + C2 4 C3
Ch 1, Return - B2 17 C4
Ch 1, L1- A2 - A3, A4
Ch 2, L1+ - - B5, B6
Ch 2, Voltage Input + C3 5 C5
Ch 2, Current Bridge B3 18 C6
Ch 2, L1- A3 - A5, A6
Ch 2, L1+ - - B7, B8
Ch 2, Current Input + C4 6 C7
Ch 2, Return - B4 19 C8
Ch 2, L1- A4 - A7, A8
Ch 3, L2+ - - B9, B10
Ch 3, Voltage Input + C5 7 C9
Ch 3, Current Bridge B5 20 C10
Ch 3, L2- A5 - A9, A10
Ch 3, L2+ - - B11, B12
Ch 3, Current Input + C6 8 C11
Ch 3, Return - B6 21 C12
Ch 3, L2- A6 - A11, A12
Ch 4, L2+ - - B13, B14
Ch 4, Voltage Input + C7 9 C13
Ch 4, Current Bridge B7 22 C14
Ch 4, L2- A7 - A13, A14
Ch 4, L2+ - - B15, B16
Ch 4, Current Input + C8 10 C15
Ch 4, Return - B8 23 C16
Ch 4, L2- A8 - A15, A16
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
(1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM.
Features
• 8 channels for RTD (Pt100, Cu10, Ni100 and Ni120 and
resistor) inputs
• 3-wire connection to RTDs
F
• 14 Bit resolution R
• Inputs are monitored for open-circuit, short-circuit and has a W
input grounded sensor
• EMC protection 1
• DIN rail mounting
2
Description
The AI830 RTD Input Module has 8 channels for 3
measurement of temperature with resistive elements
(RTDs). Only 3-wire connections are possible. All the
4
RTDs must be isolated from ground.
The AI830 can be used with Pt100, Cu10, Ni100, Ni120 or 5
resistive sensors. Linearization and conversion of the
temperature to Centigrade or Fahrenheit is performed on
the module. Every channel can be individually configured. 6
Description (continued)
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU and the TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU
enables three wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin
(male) connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-5. AI830 RTD Input Module Specifications at 25°C
AI830
Feature
RTD Input Module
Number of channels 8
Current consumption 5V 80 mA
-200...850°C Pt100 (2) Max. 0.08% >13 bit Max. 5 ppm/°C 360 ms + n x 80 ms
-328...1562°F Typ. 0.05%
-60...180°C Ni100 (3) Max. 0.08% >12 bit Max. 5 ppm/°C 360 ms + n x 100 ms
-76...356°F according to Typ. 0.05%
DIN 43760
-80...260°C Ni120 (4) Max. 0.08% >13 bit Max. 5 ppm/°C 360 ms + n x 80 ms
-112...500°F Typ. 0.05%
-100...260°C Cu10 (5) Max. 0.2% >10 bit Max. 5 ppm/°C 360 ms + n x 100 ms
-148...500°F Typ. 0.15%
FAULT
RUN
WARNING
ZP
Pos
I1+
I1- LP
ZP Block
ModuleBus
5V
I5+ 0V
I5- LP Power_ok
ZP
+12V +24V
I8+ ZP
I8- LP -12V 0V24V
ZP
Ref:s
ZP
EM
Process Connections
Table A-7. AI830 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Connection Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
- L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
- - - B1, B2
Ch1, + Input C1 3 C1
Ch1, - Input B1 16 C2
Ch1, Return (ZP) A1 - A1, A2
- - - B3, B4
Ch 2, + Input C2 4 C3
Ch 2, - Input B2 17 C4
Ch 2, Return (ZP) A2 - A3, A4
- - - B5, B6
Ch 3, + Input C3 5 C5
Ch 3, - Input B3 18 C6
Ch 3, Return (ZP) A3 - A5, A6
- - - B7, B8
Ch 4, + Input C4 6 C7
Ch 4, - Input B4 19 C8
Ch 4, Return (ZP) A4 - A7, A8
- - - B9, B10
Ch 5, + Input C5 7 C9
Ch 5, - Input B5 20 C10
Ch 5, Return (ZP) A5 - A9, A10
- - - B11, B12
Ch 6, + Input C6 8 C11
Ch 6, - Input B6 21 C12
Ch 6, Return (ZP) A6 - A11, A12
- - - B13, B14
Ch 7, + Input C7 9 C13
Ch 7, - Input B7 22 C14
Ch 7, Return (ZP) A7 - A13, A14
- - - B15, B16
Ch 8, + Input C8 10 C15
Ch 8, - Input B8 23 C16
Ch 8, Return (ZP) A8 - A15, A16
- L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V dc (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
(1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM.
Features
• 8 differential input channels for thermocouple/mV
• Channel 8 can be designated as the CJ-channel
(4-wire Pt100 RTD)
F
• Variety of thermocouples with the following characteristics: R
B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S an T
W
• 15 Bit resolution (A/D)
• Inputs are monitored for wire-break open-circuit
1
• EMC protection
• DIN rail mounting 2
Description 3
The AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module is part of the
S800 I/O. It provides 8 differential input channels for 4
Thermocouple/mV measurements. Measurement ranges
configurable per channel are: -30mV to +75mV linear, or
TC Types B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S an T. 5
Description (continued)
Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run (Green) and Warning (Yellow). The RUN LED indicates normal
operation and the WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in
Init state, Error state or Not configured state. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned off after the first valid
access to the module.
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU or the TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU enables
three wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male)
connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-8. AI835 Thermocouple/mV Input Module Specifications at 25°C
AI835
Feature
Thermocouple/mV Input Module
Number of channels 8 (Differential)
Filter (integration) 50 Hz or 60 Hz
AI835
Feature
Thermocouple/mV Input Module
Supervision Module: reference channels, power
supply low
Channel TC: open-circuit
Linear: none
Pt100 (CH8): <-40°C (-40°F) and
>100°C (212°F)
Current consumption 24 V 50 mA
Current consumption 5 V 75 mA
NOTE
From the 11 Sensor Types above, one choice is to be selected by the user per channel.
Fault
+CH1
EMC/
-CH1 LP
+CH2
EMC/
-CH2 LP
Data
Differential A/D
ANA-
CLK
LOG
MB
FIC
MUX #
Amplifier CTRL
+CH7
EMC/ (MTI) Pos(6:0)
-CH7 LP
ADR(SPI) pow_ok
+PCJC +5V
(low)
+CH8 EMC/ 0V
Pt100 LP
-CH8
+UPint ² +24V
-PCJC GNDA ²
0V_24V
ZP ² -UPint
EM
² ²
Process Connections
Table A-10. AI835 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Connection Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
Pt100, PCJC- L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
- L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
- - - B1, B2
Ch1, + Input C1 3 C1
Ch1, - Input B1 16 C2
Ch1, Return (ZP) A1 - A1, A2
- - - B3, B4
Ch 2, + Input C2 4 C3
Ch 2, - Input B2 17 C4
Ch 2, Return (ZP) A2 - A3, A4
- - - B5, B6
Ch 3, + Input C3 5 C5
Ch 3, - Input B3 18 C6
Ch 3, Return (ZP) A3 - A5, A6
- - - B7, B8
Ch 4, + Input C4 6 C7
Ch 4, - Input B4 19 C8
Ch 4, Return (ZP) A4 - A7, A8
- - - B9, B10
Ch 5, + Input C5 7 C9
Ch 5, - Input B5 20 C10
Ch 5, Return (ZP) A5 - A9, A10
- - - B11, B12
Ch 6, + Input C6 8 C11
Ch 6, - Input B6 21 C12
Ch 6, Return (ZP) A6 - A11, A12
- - - B13, B14
Ch 7, + Input C7 9 C13
Ch 7, - Input B7 22 C14
Ch 7, Return (ZP) A7 - A13, A14
- - - B15, B16
Ch 8, + Input C8 10 C15
Ch 8, - Input B8 23 C16
Ch 8, Return (ZP) A8 - A15, A16
Pt100, PCJC+ L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
- L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
(1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM.
Features
• 8 channels of 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA outputs
• OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection
• Analog Output is to be short circuit secured to ZP or +24V F
• EMC protection R
W
• DIN rail mounting
O
Description 1
The AO810 Analog Output Module has 8 unipolar analog
output channels. 2
Description (continued)
The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState
command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller (OSP timer) and is used for ModuleBus supervision.
The watchdog timer is re-triggered every time the correct node address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog
timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any)
are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent.
The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to
leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values
are written.
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU and the TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU
enables wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin
(male) connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-11. AO810 Analog Output Module Specifications at 25°C
AO810
Feature
Analog Output Module
Number of channels 8
Rise time 4 ms
Resolution 14 bit
AO810
Feature
Analog Output Module
Supervision Module: Power low
Channel: Open-circuit (current
output only)
L2+
FAULT L1+
RUN
WARNING ZP
OSP
# EMC O1
prot
Pos ZP
CPU
MBI-2
# EMC O8
5VS prot
5V ZP
ZD
Power_ok
EM
Process Connections
Table A-12. A0810 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Connection Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
- - - B1, B2
Ch1, + Output C1 3 C1
Ch1 Return (ZP) A1 16 A1, A2
- - - B3, B4
Ch 2, + Output C2 4 C3
Ch2 Return (ZP) A2 17 A3, A4
- - - B5, B6
Ch 3, + Output C3 5 C5
Ch3 Return (ZP) A3 18 A5, A6
- - - B7, B8
Ch 4, + Output C4 6 C7
Ch4 Return (ZP) A4 19 A7, A8
- - - B9, B10
Ch 5, + Output C5 7 C9
Ch5 Return (ZP) A5 20 A9, A10
- - - B11, B12
Ch 6, + Output C6 8 C11
Ch6 Return (ZP) A6 21 A11, A12
- - - B13, B14
Ch 7, + Output C7 9 C13
Ch7 Return (ZP) A7 22 A13, A14
- - - B15, B16
Ch 8, + Output C8 10 C15
Ch8 Return (ZP) A8 23 A15, A16
+24V dc L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V dc (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
(1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM.
A.6 AO820 Bipolar Analog Output Module, -20 mA...+20 mA, -10V...+10V
Features
• 4 channels of -20 mA...+20 mA, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA or -
10V...+10V, 0...10V, 2...10V outputs
• Individually galvanically isolated channels
F
• OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection R
• EMC protection W
O
• DIN rail mounting
1
Description
The AO820 Analog Output Module has 4 bipolar analog
output channels. The choice of current or voltage output is
configurable for each channel. There are separate sets of 2
terminals for voltage and current outputs, and it is up to the
user to wire outputs properly. The only differences between
current or voltage channel configuration is in software
settings.
3
To supervise the communication to the D/A-converters the
output data is read back and verified. The open-circuit
diagnostics are read continuously as well.
Four LEDs are used to indicate the state of the device. The
RUN (green) LED indicates that the device is in 4
operational state. The FAULT (red) LED indicates that the
device is in an error state, or a power fault has been
detected. In Not configured state the FAULT LED is turned
off after the first valid access to the module. The
WARNING (yellow) LED indicates that there is some kind AO820
of process error such as an open circuit. OSP (yellow) LED ±20 mA, ±10V Isolated
indicates that the output values are set to the OSP value.
The module cyclically performs self-diagnostics. Module
diagnostics include: Process power supply supervision
causes a module failure if detected. Channel diagnostics
include: Fault detection of the channel. (Only reported on
active channels). The error is reported if the output current
is different than configured (that is, open wire condition).
(continued on next page)
Description (continued)
The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState
command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog
timer is re-triggered every time the correct node address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires
or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are set to
their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or as the last good value sent.
The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to
leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values
are written.
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU and the TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU
enables wire connection to the devices without additional terminals. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin
(male) connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-13. AO820 Analog Output Module Specifications at 25°C
AO820
Feature
Analog Output Module
Number of channels 4
AO820
Feature
Analog Output Module
Current consumption 5V, maximum 100 mA
FAULT
RUN Iso Power U,I Amp
WARNING and Amp
OSP O1U+
EMC
S/H protect O1I+
O1U-
Current sense
O1I-
ZP1
Pos CPU
DAT+ EM
DAT-
CLK+
ModuleBus
CLK- #
5VS
MBI-2
+0V24 O4U-
Current sense
Block O4I-
Power_ok ZP4
EM
Process Connections
Table A-14. A0820 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
TU830
Process Connection (or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
- - - B1, B2
Ch1, Current Output + C1 3 C1
Ch1, Current Output - B1 16 C2
- A1 - A1, A2
- - - B3, B4
Ch1, Voltage Output + C2 4 C3
Ch1, Voltage Output - B2 17 C4
- A2 - A3, A4
- - - B5, B6
Ch2, Current Output + C3 5 C5
Ch2, Current Output - B3 18 C6
- A3 - A5, A6
- - - B7, B8
Ch2, Voltage Output + C4 6 C7
Ch2, Voltage Output - B4 19 C8
- A4 - A7, A8
- - - B9, B10
Ch3, Current Output + C5 7 C9
Ch3, Current Output - B5 20 C10
- A5 - A9, A10
- - - B11, B12
Ch3, Voltage Output + C6 8 C11
Ch3, Voltage Output - B6 21 C12
- A6 - A11, A12
- - - B13, B14
Ch4, Current Output + C7 9 C13
Ch4, Current Output - B7 22 C14
- A7 - A13, A14
- - - B15, B16
Ch4, Voltage Output + C8 10 C15
Ch4, Voltage Output - B8 23 C16
- A8 - A15, A16
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V d.c. (ZP) L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
(1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM.
Features
• 2 twisted-pair Advant Fieldbus 100 modems which allows
use of redundant cable media
• Supervisory functions of I/O ModuleBus F R
P
• Isolated power supply to I/O modules T1 T2
Description
The CI810/CI810A Fieldbus Communications Interface
(FCI) is an intelligent communication interface between an
Advant Controller via the Advant Fieldbus 100 fieldbus
and the S800 I/O modules via the ModuleBus.
CI810/CI810A has four basic parts: Module termination SERVICE
board, power supply board, processor board and the fiber STN. ADDR.
4 56
optic ModuleBus module (see block diagram). 3 7 x 10
2 8
The power supply board has an isolated power converter 109
4 56
that generates a short circuit proof +5V supply for the 1)
3 7 x1
2 8
CI810/CI810A and I/O modules. It also contains opto- CI810 109
isolated RS232 drivers/receivers for the service port.
The Processor board contains the CPU, RAM, Flash AF100 Tx Rx
L+ L+ SA 1 2
PROM, ModuleBus interfaces, Advant Fieldbus 100 L- L- SB
protocol chip, LED indicators and two rotary switches for + + Tx
the units AF100 station address. - -
SH SH
The termination board is a unit where most of the X1B SH Rx
SH
connections to the outside takes place. It is grounded to the
DIN-rail through a metallic spring connector. The board X1A
carries screw terminals for power supply and redundant
power supply monitoring, screw terminals for
Advant Fieldbus 100 twisted-pair, connector for the service X2 X3
port, connector for the Optical ModuleBus Port
1) or CI810A
TB810/TB811 and the electrical ModuleBus. It also carries
a replaceable fuse for the +24V supply of the I/O modules
and the electrical ModuleBus and a capacitor for back-up
of memory.
Technical Data
Table A-15. CI810/CI810A FCI Specifications
Item Value
Microprocessor (CPU) Motorola MC68340 running at 8 bit
mode with a speed of 16 MHz
Flash PROM 512 kbyte
Fast RAM CI810 256 kbyte (backed-up)
C!810A 512 kbyte (backed-up)
RAM back-up time 10 minutes (1F capacitor)
Power Input 24V d.c. (19.2 - 30)
Rated isolation voltage 50V
Isolation test voltage 500V a.c.
Power input fuse (F1), valid only for 1.6A Fast
electrical ModuleBus, ModuleBus feed
Power consumption at 24V d.c. 110 mA
Power dissipation 2.6 W
Power supply monitoring inputs Max. input voltage: 30V
Min. input voltage for high level: 15V
Max. input voltage for low level: 8V
Service port (D-sub 9-pole socket) Opto-isolated (RS-232);
19.2 Kbaud/s maximum
Advant Fieldbus (Ch1 & Ch2) Max 32 loads
Isolation test voltage 2kV
ModuleBus, valid for local/electrical Maximum of 12 I/O modules
With opto-coupling Maximum of 24 I/O modules
Power output - ModuleBus 24V max. = 1.3A
5V max. = 1.5A
Item Value
Connector for Optical ModuleBus Fiber optic interface, one transmit and
(TB810/TB811) one receive connection.
Indicators R(un) LED: Green indicates that
CI810 is operational
F(ault) LED: Red indicates a fault
condition; Reset and halt (CPU signal)
turns the LED on
P(owok) LED: Green indicates that the
DC/DC converter generates a valid
+5V d.c.
T1 and T2 traffic LEDs: Yellow
(blinking) indicates that the CI810 is
receiving data on the two AF100
twisted-pair channels respectively
RX, TX on TB810 indicate traffic on
the optical ModuleBus.
Connections
Table A-16. Power Supply Connections
E
X3
Fiber Optic RX
O
SH2 4
ModuleBus Module
E
3
TX
O
CH2- 2
TB810
CH2+ 1
LOGIC
STN.
ADDR BAP
X2
SH1 4
MC68340
3
DDCC+
CH1- 2
CH1+ 1
FLASH
RAM +VB
T1 Reset logic,
+5V Supervision
T2
RS-485
+5V +5V
P(owok) RS-485 DIN-rail
R(un) X9
0V 0V POWOK
F(ault) D+,D-
+5V CLK+,CLK-
POS(9:0)
+5V
Electrical ModuleBus
+5V Connector
+5V +5V 0V
0V24
0V +24V
0V 0V
X4
0V
Service Port
Connector
BATOK
+5V
X1A
0V SB 3
Power Supply Monitor B
IRQ7-N
2
DC DC L- 1 0V d.c.
DC DC F1
X1B
SA 3
Power Supply Monitor A
2
L+ 1 +24V d.c.
Features
• Redundant operation with another CI820 and a TB815 F R
Interconnection Unit P
Description (continued)
The termination board is a unit where most of the connections to the outside takes place. It is grounded to the DIN-rail
through a metallic spring connector. The board carries screw terminals for power supply and redundant power supply
monitoring, screw terminals for Advant Fieldbus 100 twisted-pair. It also carries a connector to the TB815
Interconnection Unit for the service port, and the optical and electrical ModuleBus.
Technical Data
Table A-19. CI820 FCI Specifications
Item Value
Microprocessor (CPU) Motorola MC68340 running at 8 bit
mode with a speed of 16 MHz
Flash PROM 512 kbyte
Fast SRAM 512 kbyte (backed-up)
RAM back-up time 10 minutes (1F capacitor)
Power Input 24V d.c. (19.2 - 30)
Rated isolation voltage 50V
Isolation test voltage 500V a.c.
Power consumption at 24V d.c. (typical) 250 mA
Power dissipation 6.0 W
Power supply monitoring inputs Max. input voltage: 30V
Min. input voltage for high level: 15 V
Max. input voltage for low level: 8 V
Service port (D-sub 9-pole socket) Opto-isolated (RS-232);
19.2 Kbaud/s maximum
Advant Fieldbus (Ch1 & Ch2) Max 32 loads
Isolation test voltage 2kV
ModuleBus Maximum of 12 I/O modules
With opto-coupling Maximum of 24 I/O modules
Item Value
Power output - ModuleBus 24V max. = 1.3A
5V max. = 1.5A
Indicators R(un) LED: Green indicates that CI820
is operational.
F(ault) LED: Red indicates a fault
condition; Reset and halt (CPU signal)
turns the LED on.
P(owok) LED: Green indicates that the
DC/DC converter generates a valid +5V
d.c.
T1 and T2 traffic LEDs: Yellow
(blinking) indicates that the CI820 is
receiving data on the two AF100
twisted-pair channels respectively.
PR(imary) LED: Yellow indicates that it
is operating as the primary FCI.
DU(al) LED: Green indicates that both
FCI are configured for redundancy and
redundant operation is OK.
Connections
Table A-20. Power Supply Connections
FCL FCL
GLUE GLUE
BAP2 BAP2
Termination
RS-485
RS-485
MC68340 MC68340
DDCC+
TB810
TB810
PR FLASH PR
DU DU
RAM RAM
T1 Reset logic, Reset logic, T1
+5V Superv.
Electrical Modulebus
+5V Superv. T2
T2
Connector
BC +5V +5V +5V +5V BC P
P
0V 0V R
R
F
CI820-2 0V 0V 0V 0V CI820-2 F
POWOK MB
+5V MB
DC DC
DC +5V +5V +5V
DC
+5V
+5V +5V
DC DC
Service Port
Service Port
Connector
Connector
DC 0V
DC
0V 0V 0V
IRQ7-N
IRQ7-N
0V 0V
DC DC DC DC
DC DC DC DC
+24V/0V24
PARTNER PARTNER
0V 0V 0V 0V
Current
Current
Limiter
Limiter
TB815
1 CH1+
1 CH1+
2 CH1-
2 CH1-
4 SH1
4 SH1
X1A
X1B
X1A
X1B
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
2
1
3
2
1
X2
X2
3
CI820 CI820
DIN-rail
Features
• Profibus-DP fieldbus interface.
• Supervisory functions of I/O ModuleBus
F R
• Isolated power supply to I/O modules P
RX TX
• OSP handling and configuration
PROFIBUS
• DIN rail mounting
Description
The CI830 Fieldbus Communications Interface (FCI) is an
intelligent communication interface between a Controller
via the Profibus-DP fieldbus and the S800 I/O modules via
the ModuleBus.
CI830 has four basic parts: Module termination board,
power supply board, processor board and the fiber optic SERVICE
ModuleBus module (see block diagram). STN. ADDR.
4 56
3 7 x 10
The power supply board has an isolated power converter 2 8
that generates a short circuit proof +5V supply for the 109
4 56
CI830 and I/O modules. It also contains opto-isolated 3 7 x1
2 8
RS232 drivers/receivers for the service port. CI830 109
Technical Data
Table A-22. CI830 FCI Specifications
Item Value
Microprocessor (CPU) Motorola MC68340 running at 8 bit
mode with a speed of 16 MHz
Flash PROM 512 kbyte
Fast RAM 256 kbyte (backed-up)
RAM back-up time 10 minutes (1F capacitor)
Power Input 24V d.c. (19.2 - 30)
Rated Isolation Voltage 50V
Isolation Test Voltage 500V a.c.
Power Input Fuse (F1), ModuleBus feed Electronic circuit brake should not be
exchanged
Power Consumption at 24V d.c. 110 mA
Power Dissipation 2.6 W
Power Supply Monitoring Inputs Max. input voltage: 30V
Min. input voltage for high level: 15V
Max. input voltage for low level: 8V
Service Port (D-sub 9-pole socket) Opto-isolated (RS-232);
19.2 Kbaud/s maximum
Profibus-DP (D-sub 9-pole socket) Opto-isolated (RS-485);
12 Mbaud/s maximum
ModuleBus Maximum of 12 I/O modules
Power Output - ModuleBus 24V max. = 1.3A
5V max. = 1.5A
Connections
Table A-23. Power Supply Connections (X1)
E
Fiber Optical RX
O
Modulebus Module
E
TX X2
O
SHIELD 1
VP 6
DGND 5
Profibus Connector
GLUE DSUB9
STN. RxD/TxD-P 3
ADDR SPC4 RS-485
8
RxD/TxD-N
MC68340
DDCC+
FLASH
RS-485
+5V +5V
P(owok) RS-485
DIN-rail
R(un) X9
0V 0V POWOK
F(ault) D+,D-
CLK+,CLK-
POS(9:0)
+5V
Electrical Modulebus
+5V Connector
+5V +5V 0V
0V24
0V +24V
0V 0V
X3
0V Service Port
Connector
BATOK
+5V
X1
0V SB 1
IRQ7-N
L- 3
DC DC
DC DC F1
SA 2
L+ 4
Features
• 16 channels for 24V d.c. inputs with current sink
• 2 isolated groups of 8 with voltage supervision
• Input status indicators
• EMC protection F
R
• DIN rail mounting
W
Description
The DI810 is a 16 channel 24V digital input module for the 1
S800 I/O. This module has 16 digital inputs. The input 2
voltage range is 18 - 30 volt d.c. and the input current is 3
6 mA at 24V. The inputs are divided into two individually 4
isolated groups with eight channels and one voltage
supervision input in each group. 5
6
Every input channel consists of current limiting 7
components, EMC protection components, input state 8
indication LED and optical isolation barrier.
9
Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run 10
(Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per
11
channel (16) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The
12
RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING
LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED 13
indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured 14
state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off 15
after the first valid access to the module. 16
The process voltage supervision input gives an error signal
if the voltage disappears, and the Warning LED turns on. DI810
The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. 24V
Description (continued)
The input channels can be digitally filtered. The different filter times that can be achieved are 2, 4, 8 and 16 ms. This
means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than 3, 6, 12 and 24 ms will get
through the filter.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices
without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 24V process voltage supervision
inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of 24V power supply to the devices. The TU812 Compact MTU
has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-26. DI810 Digital Input Module Specifications
DI810
Feature
Digital Input Module
Number of channels 16 (2 x 8), current sink
EMC- L1+
BARRIER U1
CH 1 I1
FAULT
RUN L1+
CH 2 I2
WARNING MBI-1 .
. .
ASIC . .
. L1+
X1
Process Connector
CH 8 I8
+5VI
+5V
RESET
24V SUPER-
ModuleBus Connector
DAT
DAT-N RS-485
GROUP 2
POS0-9
EMC- L2+
BLOCK BARRIER L2+
8 8 I 9-16
/ CH 9-16 /
24V SUPER-
EEPROM ERROR 9-16 VISION
L2-
EM
Process Connections
Table A-27. DI810 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Connection Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
Ch1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2
Ch1 Input C1 3 C1
Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2
Ch1/Ch2, L1- A1 - A1, A2
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4
Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3
Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6
Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5
Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6
Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8
Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7
Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8
Ch 7/Ch8, L1- A4 - A7, A8
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10
Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9
Ch 10 Input B5 20 C10
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12
Ch 11 Input C6 8 C11
Ch 12 Input B6 21 C12
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14
Ch 13 Input C7 9 C13
Ch 14 Input B7 22 C14
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14
Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16
Ch 15 Input C8 10 C15
Ch 16 Input B8 23 C16
Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
(1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM.
Features
• 16 channels for 48V d.c. inputs
• 2 isolated groups of 8 with voltage supervision
• Input status indicators
• EMC protection F
R
• DIN rail mounting
W
Description
The DI811 is a 16 channel 48V digital input module for the 1
S800 I/O. This module has 16 digital inputs. The input 2
signal voltage range is 36 - 60 volt d.c. and the input 3
current is 4 mA at 48V. The inputs are divided into two 4
individually isolated groups with eight channels and one
voltage supervision input in each group. 5
6
Every input channel consists of current limiting 7
components, EMC protection components, input state 8
indication LED and optical isolation barrier.
9
Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run 10
(Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per
11
channel (16) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The
12
RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING
LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED 13
indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured 14
state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off 15
after the first valid access to the module. 16
The process voltage supervision input gives an error signal
if the voltage disappears, and the Warning LED turns on. DI811
The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. 48V
Description (continued)
The input channels can be digitally filtered. The different filter times that can be achieved are 2, 4, 8 and 16 ms. This
means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than 3, 6, 12 and 24 ms will get
through the filter.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices
without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 48V process voltage supervision
inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of 48V power supply to the devices. The TU812 Compact MTU
has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-28. DI811 Digital Input Module Specifications
DI811
Feature
Digital Input Module
Number of channels 16 (2 x 8), current sink
Input Impedance 11 kΩ
EMC- L1+
BARRIER U1
CH 1 I1
FAULT
RUN L1+
CH 2 I2
WARNING MBI-1 .
. .
ASIC . .
. L1+
X1
Process Connector
CH 8 I8
+5VI
+5V
RESET
48V SUPER-
ModuleBus Connector
DAT
DAT-N RS-485
GROUP 2
POS0-9
EMC- L2+
BLOCK BARRIER L2+
8 8 I 9-16
/ CH 9-16 /
48V SUPER-
EEPROM ERROR 9-16 VISION
L2-
EM
Process Connections
Table A-29. DI811 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Connection Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
+48V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
Ch1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2
Ch1 Input C1 3 C1
Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2
Ch1/Ch2, L1- A1 - A1, A2
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4
Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3
Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6
Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5
Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6
Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8
Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7
Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8
Ch 7/Ch8, L1- A4 - A7, A8
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10
Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9
Ch 10 Input B5 20 C10
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12
Ch 11 Input C6 8 C11
Ch 12 Input B6 21 C12
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14
Ch 13 Input C7 9 C13
Ch 14 Input B7 22 C14
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14
Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16
Ch 15 Input C8 10 C15
Ch 16 Input B8 23 C16
Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16
+48V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
(1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM.
Features
• 16 channels for 24V d.c. inputs with current source
• 2 Isolated groups of 8 with voltage supervision
• Input status indicators
• EMC protection F
R
• DIN rail mounting
W
Description
The DI814 is a 16 channel 24V digital input module with 1
current source for the S800 I/O. The input voltage range is 2
18 - 30 volt dc and the input current source is 6 mA at 24V. 3
The inputs are divided into two individually isolated 4
groups with eight channels and one voltage supervision
input in each group. 5
6
Every input channel consists of current limiting 7
components, EMC protection components, input state 8
indication LED and optical isolation barrier.
9
Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run 10
(Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per
11
channel (16) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The
12
RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING
LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED 13
indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured 14
state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off 15
after the first valid access to the module. 16
The process voltage supervision input gives an error signal
if the voltage disappears, and the Warning LED turns on. DI814
The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus. 24V
Description (continued)
The input channels can be digitally filtered. The different filter times that can be achieved are 2, 4, 8 and 16 ms. This
means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than 3, 6, 12 and 24 ms will get
through the filter.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices
without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 24V process voltage supervision
inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of 24V power supply to the devices. The TU812 Compact MTU
has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-30. DI814 Digital Input Module Specifications
DI814
Feature
Digital Input Module
Number of channels 16 (2 x 8), current source
Process Connector
CH 8 I8
RESET
+5V
POWER-OK 24V SUPER-
Modulebus Connector
DAT+ ZP1
DAT- RS-485
CLK+
CLK- RS-485
GROUP 2
POS0-6 EMC- UP2
BLOCK BARRIER U9-16
8 CH 9-16 8 I 9-16
/ /
24V SUPER-
EEPROM ERROR 9-16 VISION
ZP2
EM
Process Connections
Table A-31. DI814 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Connection Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
Ch1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2
Ch1 Input C1 3 C1
Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2
Ch1/Ch2, L1- A1 - A1, A2
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4
Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3
Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6
Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5
Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6
Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8
Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7
Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8
Ch 7/Ch8, L1- A4 - A7, A8
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10
Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9
Ch 10 Input B5 20 C10
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12
Ch 11 Input C6 8 C11
Ch 12 Input B6 21 C12
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14
Ch 13 Input C7 9 C13
Ch 14 Input B7 22 C14
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14
Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16
Ch 15 Input C8 10 C15
Ch 16 Input B8 23 C16
Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
(1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM.
Features
• 8 channels for 120V a.c./d.c. inputs
• Individually isolated points
• Voltage supervision of field input power F
R
• Input status indicators
W
• Signal filtering
• EMC protection 1
• DIN rail mounting
2
Description
The DI820 is an 8 channel 120V a.c./d.c. digital input 3
module for the S800 I/O. This module has 8 digital inputs.
The a.c. input voltage range is 77 - 130 volt and the input 4
current is 10 mA at 120V a.c. The d.c. input range is
75 - 145V and the input current is 2.8 mA at 110V. The
5
inputs are individually isolated.
Every input channel consists of current limiting 6
components, EMC protection components, input state
indication LED, optical isolation barrier and an analog
7
filter (6 ms).
Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run 8
(Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per
channel (8) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The
RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING DI820
LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED 120V a.c.
indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured
state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off
after the first valid access to the module.
Channel 1 can be used as voltage supervision input for
channels 2 - 4, and channel 8 can be used as voltage
supervision input for channels 5 - 7.
If the voltage connected to channel 1 or 8 disappears, the
error inputs are activated and the Warning LED turns on.
The error signal can be read from the ModuleBus. This
supervision can be enabled/disabled with a parameter. If
the error inputs are disabled channel 1 and 8 can be used as
normal input channels.
(continued on next page)
Description (continued)
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
The input channels can be digitally filtered. The different filter times that can be achieved are 2, 4, 8 and 16 ms. This
means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than 3, 6, 12 and 24 ms will get
through the filter.
Two different types of MTUs can be used, TU831 Extended MTU and TU811 Compact MTU both have two terminals
per channel.
Technical Data
Table A-32. DI820 Digital Input Module Specifications
DI820
Feature
Digital Input Module
Number of channels 8
Impedance 12 kΩ (a.c.)
39 KΩ (d.c.)
FAULT
RUN Rectifiers and
filters
WARNING I 1.1
CH 1
I 1.2
E2-4
1
X1 I 2.1
CH 2
MBI-1 I 2.2
+5VI
+5V ASIC
RESET
I 3.1
POWER-OK CH 3
Process Connector
I 3.2
ModuleBus Connector
0V
I 4.1
DAT+ CH 4
I 4.2
DAT- RS-485
I 5.1
CLK+ CH 5
I 5.2
CLK- RS-485
I 6.1
POS0-6 CH 6
I 6.2
BLOCK
I 7.1
CH 7
I 7.2
EEPROM
I 8.1
CH 8
I 8.2
E5-7
1
Process Connections
Table A-33. DI820 Process Connections
Ch 1.2 Input A1 A1
Ch 2.1 Input C2 B2
Ch 2.2 Input A2 A2
Ch 3.1 Input B3 B3
Ch 3.2 Input A3 A3
Ch 4.1 Input C4 B4
Ch 4.2 Input A4 A4
Ch 5.1 Input B5 B5
Ch 5.2 Input A5 A5
Ch 6.1 Input C6 B6
Ch 6.2 Input A6 A6
Ch 7.1 Input B7 B7
Ch 7.2 Input A7 A7
Ch 8.1 Input C8 B8
Ch 8.2 Input A8 A8
Features
• 8 channels for 230V a.c./d.c. inputs
• Individually isolated points
• Voltage supervision of field input power F
R
• Input status indicators
W
• Signal filtering
• EMC protection 1
• DIN rail mounting
2
Description
The DI821 is an 8 channel 230V a.c./d.c. digital input 3
module for the S800 I/O. This module has 8 digital inputs.
The ac input voltage range is 164 - 264 volt and the input 4
current is 11 mA at 230V a.c. The d.c. input voltage range
is 175 - 275 volt and the input current is 1.6 mA at
5
220V d.c. The inputs are individually isolated.
Every input channel consists of current limiting 6
components, EMC protection components, input state
indication LED, optical isolation barrier and an analog
7
filter (6 ms).
Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run 8
(Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per
channel (8) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The
RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING
DI821
LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED 230V a.c.
indicates that the module is in Init state or Not configured
state. In Not Configured state the FAULT LED is turned off
after the first valid access to the module.
Channel 1 can be used as voltage supervision input for
channels 2 - 4, and channel 8 can be used as voltage
supervision input for channels 5 - 7.
If the voltage connected to channel 1 or 8 disappears, the
error inputs are activated and the Warning LED turns on.
The error signal can be read from the ModuleBus. This
supervision can be enabled/disabled with the a parameter.
If the error inputs are disabled channel 1 and 8 can be used
as normal input channels.
(continued on next page)
Description (continued)
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
The input channels can be digitally filtered. The different filter times that can be achieved are 2, 4, 8 and 16 ms. This
means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than 3, 6, 12 and 24 ms will get
through the filter.
Two different types of MTUs can be used, TU831 Extended MTU and TU811 Compact MTU both have two terminals
per channel.
Technical Data
Table A-34. DI821 Digital Input Module Specifications
DI821
Feature
Digital Input Module
Number of channels 8
Impedance 21 kΩ (a.c.)
134 KΩ (d.c.)
FAULT
RUN Rectifiers and
filters
WARNING I 1.1
CH 1
I 1.2
E2-4
1
X1 I 2.1
CH 2
MBI-1 I 2.2
+5VI
+5V ASIC
RESET
I 3.1
POWER-OK CH 3
Process Connector
I 3.2
ModuleBus Connector
0V
I 4.1
DAT+ CH 4
I 4.2
DAT- RS-485
I 5.1
CLK+ CH 5
I 5.2
CLK- RS-485
I 6.1
POS0-6 CH 6
I 6.2
BLOCK
I 7.1
CH 7
I 7.2
EEPROM
I 8.1
CH 8
I 8.2
E5-7
1
Process Connections
Table A-35. DI821 Process Connections
Ch 1.2 Input A1 A1
Ch 2.1 Input C2 B2
Ch 2.2 Input A2 A2
Ch 3.1 Input B3 B3
Ch 3.2 Input A3 A3
Ch 4.1 Input C4 B4
Ch 4.2 Input A4 A4
Ch 5.1 Input B5 B5
Ch 5.2 Input A5 A5
Ch 6.1 Input C6 B6
Ch 6.2 Input A6 A6
Ch 7.1 Input B7 B7
Ch 7.2 Input A7 A7
Ch 8.1 Input C8 B8
Ch 8.2 Input A8 A8
Features
• 16 channels for 24V d.c. inputs
• 2 isolated groups of 8 channels with voltage supervision
F
• Input status indicators
R
• Sequence of event (SOE) functionality W
• Shutter filter
• EMC protection 1
2
• DIN rail mounting
3
Description 4
5
The DI830 is a 16 channel 24V d.c. digital input module for
the S800 I/O. The input voltage range is 18 - 30Vd.c. and 6
the input current is 6 mA at 24V d.c. 7
8
Each input channel consists of current limiting
9
components, EMC protection components, input state
indication LED and optical isolation barrier. 10
11
Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run
12
(Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per
13
channel (16) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The
RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING 14
LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED 15
indicates that the module is in the Init state, Error state or 16
Not Configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT
LED is turned off after the first valid master frame to the DI830
module. 24V, SOE
The process voltage supervision input gives an error signal
if the voltage disappears, and the Warning LED turns on.
The error signal can be read via the Modulebus.
(continued on next page)
Description (continued)
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
The input signals can be digitally filtered. The filter is selectable from 0 to 100 ms. This means that pulses shorter than
the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than specified will get through the filter.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The Extended MTU (for example TU830) enables three wire connection to
the transducers without additional terminals. The Compact MTU (for example TU810 or TU 814) has terminals for
process voltage supervision inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of process power supply to the
transducers. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process.
Modes
• Event Recording
The DI830 Input Module can be used for event recording (SOE), that is, changing signals at digital input channels
can be announced together with a time stamp indicating when it occurred. The time stamp has a resolution of
0.4 millisecond, and is compensated for the filter time.
The module has intermediate storage for 32 events.
The SOE functionality can be switched on and off per channel.
For all channels with enabled SOE capability, a shutter filter is implemented that prevents intermediate storage for
events from overflow. The shutter filter is closed as soon as the number of events generated within the shutter
period (0-255 seconds) exceeds the shutter trigger number (0-255 changes). The shutter filter remains closed as
long as the recovery time (0-65535 seconds) has not expired.
Technical Data
Table A-36. DI830 Digital Input Module Specifications
DI830
Feature
Digital Input Module
Number of channels 16 (2 x 8), current sink
Shutter filter
Shutter period 0.. 255 s
Shutter trigger 0.. 255 changes
Recovery time 0.. 65535 s
EMC- UP1
BARRIER U1
CH 1 I1
FAULT
RUN U2
CH 2 I2
WARNING RWM .
X1 MBI-2 . .
. .
ASIC . U8
+5VI DATA
CH 8 I8
Process Connector
+5V
RESET
ADDRESS 24V
POWER-OK CPU SUPER-
0V ERROR VISION
68HC12
Modulebus Connector
1-8
DAT+ ZP1
DAT- RS-485
GROUP 2
CLK+ EEPROM
EMC- UP2
CLK- RS-485
BARRIER U9-16
8 8
POS0-6 CH / I 9-16
FPROM /
BLOCK 9-16 24V
SUPER-
ERROR VISION
9-16 ZP2
3
/
PROGR
MODE
EM
X3 BDM
Process Connections
Table A-37. DI830 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Connection Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
+24V d.c. Group 1 L1+ 1, 14 L1+
0V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1-
Ch1 Input C1 3 C1
Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2
Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3
Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4
Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5
Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6
Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7
Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8
Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9
Ch 10 Input B5 20 C10
Ch 11 Input C6 8 C11
Ch 12 Input B6 21 C12
Ch 13 Input C7 9 C13
Ch 14 Input B7 22 C14
Ch 15 Input C8 10 C15
Ch 16 Input B8 23 C16
+24V d.c. Group 2 L2+ 11, 24 L2+
0V d.c. Group 2 L2- 12, 25 L2-
(1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM.
Features
• 16 channels for 48V d.c. inputs
• 2 isolated groups of 8 channels with voltage supervision
F
• Input status indicators R
• Sequence of event (SOE) functionality W
• Shutter filter
1
• EMC protection
2
• DIN rail mounting 3
Description 4
5
The DI831 is a 16 channel 48V digital input module for the
6
S800 I/O. The input voltage range is 36 - 60Vd.c. and the
7
input current is 4 mA at 48V d.c.).
8
Each input channel consists of current limiting 9
components, EMC protection components, input state
10
indication LED and optical isolation barrier.
11
Three LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run 12
(Green) and Warning (Yellow). One LED (Yellow) per 13
channel (16) indicate input state (On = 1 and Off = 0). The
14
RUN LED indicates normal operation and the WARNING
LED indicates if any error input is active. The FAULT LED 15
indicates that the module is in the Init state, Error state or 16
Not Configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT
LED is turned off after the first valid master frame to the DI831
module. 48V, SOE
The process voltage supervision input gives an error signal
if the voltage disappears, and the Warning LED turns on.
The error signal can be read via the Modulebus.
(continued on next page
Description (continued)
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
The input signals can be digitally filtered. The filter is selectable from 0 to 100 ms. This means that pulses shorter than
the filter time will be filtered out and pulses longer than specified will get through the filter.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The Extended MTU (for example TU830) enables three wire connection to
the transducers without additional terminals. The Compact MTU (for example TU810 or TU 814) has terminals for
process voltage supervision inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of process power supply to the
transducers. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process.
Modes
• Event Recording
The DI831 Input Module can be used for event recording (SOE), that is, changing signals at digital input channels
can be announced together with a time stamp indicating when it occurred. The time stamp has a resolution of
0.4 millisecond, and is compensated for the filter time.
The module has intermediate storage for 32 events.
The SOE functionality can be switched on and off per channel.
For all channels with enabled SOE capability, a shutter filter is implemented that prevents intermediate storage for
events from overflow. The shutter filter is closed as soon as the number of events generated within the shutter
period (0-255 seconds) exceeds the shutter trigger number (0-255 changes). The shutter filter remains closed as
long as the recovery time (0-65535 seconds) has not expired.
Technical Data
Table A-38. DI831 Digital Input Module Specifications
DI831
Feature
Digital Input Module
Number of channels 16 (2 x 8), current sink
Input impedance 11 kΩ
Shutter filter
Shutter period 0.. 255 s
Shutter trigger 0.. 255 changes
Recovery time 0.. 65535 s
EMC- UP1
BARRIER U1
CH 1 I1
FAULT
RUN U2
CH 2 I2
WARNING RWM .
X1 MBI-2 . .
. .
ASIC . U8
+5VI DATA
CH 8 I8
Process Connector
+5V
RESET
ADDRESS 24V
POWER-OK CPU SUPER-
0V ERROR VISION
68HC12
Modulebus Connector
1-8
DAT+ ZP1
DAT- RS-485
GROUP 2
CLK+ EEPROM
EMC- UP2
CLK- RS-485
BARRIER U9-16
8 8
POS0-6 CH / I 9-16
FPROM /
BLOCK 9-16 24V
SUPER-
ERROR VISION
9-16 ZP2
3
/
PROGR
MODE
EM
X3 BDM
Process Connections
Table A-39. DI831 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Connection Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
+48V d.c. Group 1 L1+ 1, 14 L1+
0V d.c. Group 1 L1- 2, 15 L1-
Ch1 Input C1 3 C1
Ch 2 Input B1 16 C2
Ch 3 Input C2 4 C3
Ch 4 Input B2 17 C4
Ch 5 Input C3 5 C5
Ch 6 Input B3 18 C6
Ch 7 Input C4 6 C7
Ch 8 Input B4 19 C8
Ch 9 Input C5 7 C9
Ch 10 Input B5 20 C10
Ch 11 Input C6 8 C11
Ch 12 Input B6 21 C12
Ch 13 Input C7 9 C13
Ch 14 Input B7 22 C14
Ch 15 Input C8 10 C15
Ch 16 Input B8 23 C16
+48V d.c. L2+ 11, 24 L2+
0V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2-
(1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM.
Features
• 8 channels for 24/48V d.c. inputs
• Input status indicators
• Sequence of event (SOE) functionality
F
• External 24 or 48V d.c. sensor power supply R
• Internal 48V d.c. sensor power supply W
Description (continued)
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
The input signals of the input module DI885 can be filtered to suppress any electrical interference or contact bounce.The
filter is selectable from 0 to 255 ms. This means that noise pulses shorter than the filter time will be filtered out and
pulses longer than specified will get through the filter.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. TheTU830 Extended MTU and the TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has
terminals for process voltage inputs and three terminals per channel. The TU812 Compact MTU has a D-Sub 25 pin
(male) connector for connection to the process.
Modes
• Event Recording
The DI885 Input Module can be used for event recording (SOE), that is, changing signals at digital input channels
can be announced together with a time stamp indicating when it occurred. The time stamp has a resolution of
1 millisecond, and is compensated for the filter time.
The module has intermediate storage for 32 events.
The SOE functionality can be switched on and off per channel.
For all channels with enabled SOE capability, a shutter filter is implemented that prevents intermediate storage for
events from overflow. The shutter filter is closed as soon as the number of events generated within the shutter
period (0-255 seconds) exceeds the shutter trigger number (0-255 changes). The shutter filter remains closed as
long as the recovery time (0-65535 seconds) has not expired.
• Channel Supervision
The DI885 is able to supervise the process channel regarding wire break of sensor cable, missing sensor and short
circuit of sensor voltage to module ground.
The supervision can be switched on and off per device. The channel supervision is only possible when the contact
is equipped with a parallel resistor of 4.75 kΩ ±20%, and 48V sensor power.
• Dry Contacts not supervised with external Power Supply: >= 60V d.c./ max. 4 mA
The maximum input voltage of 60VDC must be kept strictly.
Change-over contacts can be connected to the input module with use of two input channels each providing one
binary signal. Non-equivalence supervision must be configured and execution within the application program.
Technical Data
7DEOH $ DI885 Digital Input Module Specifications
DI885
Feature
Digital Input Module
Number of channels 8, current sink
Power supply:
Nominal voltage 24 V d.c.
Operating voltage range 19.2 to 30V d.c.
Shutter filter
Shutter period 0.. 255 s
Shutter trigger 0.. 255 changes
Recovery time 0.. 65535 s
Current consumption
5V 160 mA
24V internal 91 mA
24V external 91 mA
48V external 22 mA
Power dissipation(1) 3W
X2
EMC- L1+
BARRIER L1-
CH 1 I1
FAULT 1
L1+
RUN
CH 2 I2
WARNING MBI-2
ASIC . .
X1 (CPU)
+5VI .
+5V .
RESET
POWER-OK L1+ .
Modulebus Connector
0V .
Process Connector
.
DAT
.
DAT-N RS-485 .
CH 8 L1+
POS0-9 8
I8
BLOCK
24V 24V SUPER-
ERROR 1-8 VISION
EEPROM L1-
RAM
EM
24V
48V
48V d.c.
Power
Switch 24V d.c.
Process Connections
7DEOH $ DI885 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Connection Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
+24V d.c. ext. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
Ch1 +48V B1 16 C2
Ch1 Input C1 3 C1
Ch 2 +48V B2 17 C4
Ch 2 Input C2 4 C3
Ch 3 +48V B3 18 C6
Ch 3 Input C3 5 C5
Ch 4 +48V B4 19 C8
Ch 4 Input C4 6 C7
Ch 5 +48V B5 20 C10
Ch 5 Input C5 7 C9
Ch 6 +48V B6 21 C12
Ch 6 Input C6 8 C11
Ch 7 +48V B7 22 C14
Ch 7 Input C7 9 C13
Ch 8 +48V B8 23 C16
Features
• 16 channels for 24V d.c. current sourcing outputs
• 2 isolated groups of 8 channels with process
• voltage supervision F
R
• Output status indicators
W
• OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection O
• Short-circuit protection to ground and 30V 1
• Over-voltage and over-temperature protection 2
3
• EMC protection 4
• DIN rail mounting 5
6
Description
7
The DO810 is a 16 channel 24V digital output module for 8
the S800 I/O. This module has 16 digital outputs. The 9
output voltage range is 10 - 30 volt and the maximum
10
continuous output current is 0.5A. The outputs are
protected against short circuits, over voltage and over 11
temperature. The outputs are divided into two individually 12
isolated groups with eight output channels and one voltage 13
supervision input in each group. 14
Each output channel consists of a short circuit and over 15
temperature protected high side driver, EMC protection 16
components, inductive load suppression, output state
indication LED and optical isolation barrier. DO810
24V, 0.5A
Four LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run
(Green), Warning (Yellow) and OSP (Yellow). One LED
(Yellow) per channel (16) indicate output state (On = 1 and
Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the
WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The
FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or
Not Configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT
LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module.
The OSP LED indicates that the module is in the OSP state
and that the outputs are set to their OSP values.
The process voltage supervision input gives an error signal
if the voltage disappears, and the Warning LED turns on.
The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus.
(continued on next page)
Description (continued)
The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState
command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog
timer is re-triggered every time the correct module address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer
expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are
set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent.
The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to
leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values
are written.
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
The outputs are current limited and protected against over temperature. If the outputs are overloaded the output current
will be limited. This means that the power dissipation in the output stage will increase and the output will shutdown if
the temperature in the output stage increases above 150 °C (302 °F). The output will switch on again automatically as the
component temperature has decreased to about 140 °C (284 °F). If any output is shutdown due to overload the indication
LED on that channel is also switched off. The output status of that channel can not be read from the module.
Four different types of MTUs can be used, TU830 Extended MTU and TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU have
terminals for 24V process voltage supervision inputs and two terminals per channels. The TU812 Compact MTU has a
D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-42. DO810 Digital Output Module Specifications
DO810
Feature
Digital Output Module
Number of channels 16 (2 x 8)
Type of output Transistor current source,
short circuit proof
Voltage range 12 - 32V d.c.
Load current, maximum 0.5 A
Short circuit current, maximum 2.4 A
Leakage current, maximum <10 µa
Output impedance <0.4 ohm
Maximum Field Cable Length 600 meters (656 yd.)
Current consumption +5V 80 mA
Power dissipation (1) 2.1 W
Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256 (2), 512, 1024 ms
Process voltage supervision 2 channels (1 per group)
Isolation Groupwise isolated from
ground (RIV=50V)
Mounting termination units TU810, TU812, TU814 or
TU830
MTU keying code AA
(1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated.
(2) 256 ms are used for Master. Set by the user for MOD.
24V SUPER-
VISION OUTPUT-
DRIVERS L1+
FAULT ERROR 1-8
RUN L1+
WARNING CH 1 O1
OSP L1+
MBI-1 CH 2 O2
X1
Process Connector
. .
+5VI ASIC .
. .
RESET
+5V . L1+
ModuleBus Connector
POWER-OK CH 8 O8
0V
L1-
DAT
DAT-N RS-485
GROUP 2
L2+
8 8
EEPROM / CH 9-16 / O 9-16
L2-
Process Connections
Table A-43. DO810 Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Connection Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
Ch 1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2
Ch 1 Output C1 3 C1
Ch 2 Output B1 16 C2
Ch 1/Ch 2, L1- A1 - A1, A2
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4
Ch 3 Output C2 4 C3
Ch 4 Output B2 17 C4
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6
Ch 5 Output C3 5 C5
Ch 6 Output B3 18 C6
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6
Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8
Ch 7 Output C4 6 C7
Ch 8 Output B4 19 C8
Ch 7/Ch 8, L1- A4 - A7, A8
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10
Ch 9 Output C5 7 C9
Ch 10 Output B5 20 C10
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12
Ch 11 Output C6 8 C11
Ch 12 Output B6 21 C12
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14
Ch 13 Output C7 9 C13
Ch 14 Output B7 22 C14
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14
Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16
Ch 15 Output C8 10 C15
Ch 16 Output B8 23 C16
Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
(1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM.
Features
• 16 channels for 24V d.c. current sinking outputs
• 2 isolated groups of 8 channels with process voltage
supervision F
• Output status indicators R
W
• OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection
O
• Short-circuit protection to ground and 30V
1
• Over-voltage and over-temperature protection 2
• EMC protection 3
4
• DIN rail mounting
5
Description 6
7
The DO814 is a 16 channel 24V digital output module with
current sinking for the S800 I/O. The output voltage range 8
is 10 - 30 volt and the maximum continuous current sinking 9
is 0.5A. The outputs are protected against short circuits, 10
over voltage and over temperature. The outputs are divided 11
into two individually isolated groups with eight output 12
channels and one voltage supervision input in each group. 13
Each output channel consists of a short circuit and over 14
temperature protected low side switch, EMC protection 15
components, inductive load suppression, output state 16
indication LED and optical isolation barrier.
Four LEDs indicate module status Fault (Red), Run DO814
(Green), Warning (Yellow) and OSP (Yellow). One LED 24V, 0.5A
(Yellow) per channel (16) indicate output state (On = 1 and
Off = 0). The RUN LED indicates normal operation and the
WARNING LED indicates if any error input is active. The
FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or
Not Configured state. In Not configured state the FAULT
LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module.
The OSP LED indicates that the module is in the OSP state
and that the outputs are set to their OSP values.
The process voltage supervision input gives an error signal
if the voltage disappears, and the Warning LED turns on.
The error signal can be read via the ModuleBus.
(continued on next page)
Description (continued)
The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState
command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog
timer is re-triggered every time the correct module address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer
expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are
set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent.
The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to
leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values
are written.
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK is inactive and POWOK signals is
active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The POWOK
comes from the FCI after power is applied.
The outputs are current limited and protected against over temperature. If the outputs are overloaded the output current
sinking will be limited. This means that the power dissipation in the output stage will increase and the output will
shutdown if the temperature in the output stage increases above 150 °C (302 °F). The output will switch on again
automatically as the component temperature has decreased to about 140 °C (284 °F).
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU830 Extended MTU enables three wire connection to the devices
without additional terminals. The TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU has terminals for 24V process voltage supervision
inputs, but requires external terminals for distribution of 24V power supply to the devices. The TU812 Compact MTU
has a D-Sub 25 pin (male) connector for connection to the process.
Technical Data
Table A-44. DO814 Digital Output Module Specifications
DO814
Feature
Digital Output Module
Number of channels 16 (2 x 8) current sinking
BIC GROUP 1 X2
X1 OSP U2
Process Connector
+5VI MBI-1 CH 2 O2
+5V . .
RESET
ASIC .
. .
POWER-OK . U8
Modulebus Connector
0V CH 8 O8
DAT+
ZP1
DAT- RS-485
CLK+
GROUP 2
CLK- RS-485
24V SUPER- OUTPUT
POS0-6 VISION Current Sinking-
BLOCK ERROR 9-10 DRIVERS UP2 24V
U9-16
8 CH 9-16 8 O 9-16
EEPROM / /
ZP2
Process Connections
Table A-45. DO814 Process Connection
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 male
Connection Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
0V d.c. L1- 2, 15 L1- (2)
Ch 1/Ch 2, L1+ - - B1, B2
Ch 1 Output C1 3 C1
Ch 2 Output B1 16 C2
Ch 1/Ch 2, L1- A1 - A1, A2
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1+ - - B3, B4
Ch 3 Output C2 4 C3
Ch 4 Output B2 17 C4
Ch 3/Ch 4, L1- A2 - A3, A4
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1+ - - B5, B6
Ch 5 Output C3 5 C5
Ch 6 Output B3 18 C6
Ch 5/Ch 6, L1- A3 - A5, A6
Ch 7/Ch 8, L1+ - - B7, B8
Ch 7 Output C4 6 C7
Ch 8 Output B4 19 C8
Ch 7/Ch 8, L1- A4 - A7, A8
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2+ - - B9, B10
Ch 9 Output C5 7 C9
Ch 10 Output B5 20 C10
Ch 9/Ch 10, L2- A5 - A9, A10
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2+ - - B11, B12
Ch 11 Output C6 8 C11
Ch 12 Output B6 21 C12
Ch 11/Ch 12, L2- A6 - A11, A12
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2+ - - B13, B14
Ch 13 Output C7 9 C13
Ch 14 Output B7 22 C14
Ch 13/Ch 14, L2- A7 - A13, A14
Ch 15/ Ch16, L2+ - - B15, B16
Ch 15 Output C8 10 C15
Ch 16 Output B8 23 C16
Ch 15/Ch16, L2- A8 - A15, A16
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) 11, 24 L2+ (2)
0V d.c. L2- 12, 25 L2- (2)
(1) Pin 13 connected to connector body for EM.
Features
• 8 channels for 24V d.c. current sourcing outputs
• 2 isolated groups of 4 channels with under voltage detection
• OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon communication F
error R
W
• Output status indicators and a channel wise error flag
O
• Short-circuit protection to ground and positive supply
1
• Over load protection 1F
• Open load detection 2
2F
• Two output fault operation modes:
3
Automatic reset mode and Fault latching mode
3F
• Inductive load driving capability 4
• Filament lamp load up to 10W 4F
• EMC protection 5
5F
• DIN rail mounting
6
Description 6F
Description (continued)
The FAULT LED indicates that the module is in Init state or Not Configured state. In Not Configured state the FAULT
LED is turned off after the first valid access to the module. The OSP LED indicates that the module is in the OSP state
and that the outputs are set to their OSP values.
The driver outputs provide a “free-wheel diode” to demagnetize inductive loads. No external demagnetization
arrangement is required up to loads of 1J.
DO815 outputs are able to drive filament lamp loads up to 10W, but only in Automatic reset mode.
The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState
command is received. The watchdog timer is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The watchdog
timer is re-triggered every time the correct module address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog timer
expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any) are
set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent.
The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to
leave OSP state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values
are written.
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
DO815 provides two protection operation modes. Each channel can be configured to operate in one of the two modes.
1. Automatic reset mode (Default mode): The output is switched off for a time interval by the driver’s over current
protection. Operation is resumed when the output current is below a reset value.
2. Fault latching mode (This mode in not applicable in all controllers): The output is switched off by any of the fault
conditions. The fault latch remains in fault condition until reset by temporarily setting the automatic reset mode.
The output drivers are current limited and protected against over load. If an output has a short circuit to ground the output
current will be limited and the driver will shutdown in order to minimize the power dissipation. In the automatic reset
mode the output will switch on again automatically after a defined time interval. If the short circuit condition is still
present, the output is turned of again, otherwise the normal operation is resumed. In the fault latching mode the output
remains off until the fault condition is not valid and the reset of the fault latch is activated. If any output is shutdown due
to fault condition the indication LED (Yellow) on that channel remains on if the channel is activated.The output status of
the channel can be read from the module.
Three different types of MTUs can be used, TU830 Extended MTU and TU810 (or TU814) Compact MTU have
terminals for 24V process voltage supervision inputs and two terminals per channels.
Technical Data
Table A-46. DO815 Digital Output Module Specifications
DO815
Feature
Digital Output Module
Number of channels 8 (2 x 4)
Type of output High side driver,
short circuit proof
Process voltage (L+)
Normal 24V d.c.
Range 10 - 32V d.c.
On-state output voltage drop Max. 0.5V
Load current, maximum 2 A @ 24V, 2,5A @ 30V
Total permissible current of outputs per group Max. 6A
Short circuit current Max. 4A
Open load detection current < 6 mA
Leakage current, maximum Max. 500 µA
Output impedance <0.25 ohm
Filament lamp load Max. 10W
only in Automatic reset mode
Inductive load switch off energy Max. 1J
Output signal delay Max. 0.2 ms
Switching frequency resistive load Max. 200 Hz
Switching frequency inductive load Max. 2.5 Hz
Maximum Field Cable Length 600 meters (656 yd.)
Current consumption +5V 120 mA, 150 mA max.
Power dissipation (1) 4 W @ 24V
Output Set as Predetermined (OSP) timer 256 (2), 512, 1024 ms
Isolation Groupwise isolated from
ground (RIV=50V)
Mounting termination units TU810, TU814 or TU830
MTU keying code AA
(1) Power dissipation is calculated with 70 percent of the channels activated.
(2) 256 ms are used for Master. Set by the user for MOD.
CH 1-4 F 1-4
OUTPUT-
ERR. DRIVERS L1+
FAULT 4 1-4
RUN / L1+
O1
Process Connector
.
+5VI ASIC . .
CH 4 .
RESET
+5V
L1+
ModuleBus Connector
POWER-OK CTR O4
4 1-4
0V /
L1-
DAT
DAT-N RS-485
GROUP 2
L2+
Contol
CH
4 5-8 4 O 5-8
EEPROM / /
4 CTR
/ L2-
5-8
Process Connections
Table A-47. DO815 Process Connections
TU810
Process TU830
(or TU814)
Connection Terminal
Terminal
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) L1+ (2)
0V d.c. L1- L1- (2)
Ch 1/ L1+ - B1, B2
Ch 1 Output C1, B1 C1, C2
Ch 1/L1- A1 A1, A2
Ch 2/L1+ - B3, B4
Ch 2 Output C2, B2 C3
Ch 2/, L1- A2 A3, A4
Ch 3/ L1+ - B5, B6
Ch 3Output C3, B3 C5
Ch 3/ L1- A3 A5, A6
Ch 4/ L1+ - B7, B8
Ch 4 Output C4, B4 C7
Ch 4/ L1- A4 A7, A8
Ch 5/ L2+ - B9, B10
Ch 5 Output C5, B5 C9
Ch 5/ L2- A5 A9, A10
Ch 6/ L2+ - B11, B12
Ch 6 Output C6, B6 C11
Ch 6/ L2- A6 A11, A12
Ch 7/ L2+ - B13, B14
Ch 7 Output C7, B7 C13
Ch 7/ L2- A7 A13, A14
Ch 8/ L2+ - B15, B16
Ch 8 Output C8, B8 C15
Ch 8/ L2- A8 A15, A16
+24V d.c. L2+ (2) L2+ (2)
0V d.c. L2- L2- (2)
Features
• 8 channels for 230V a.c./d.c. relay Normal Open (NO)
outputs
• 8 isolated channels
F
• Output status indicators R
• OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection W
O
• EMC protection
1
• DIN rail mounting
Description 2
Description (continued)
The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState
command is received. The watchdog timer which is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The
watchdog timer is re-triggered every time the correct node address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog
timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any)
are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent.
The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to
leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values
are written.
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU831 Extended MTU and TU811 Compact MTU enables two wire
connection to the devices without additional terminals. The extended MTU, TU836, provides an individual fuse (3A
max.) per channel on the load outlet terminals. The extended MTU, TU837 provides an individual fuse (3A max.) per
channel. Outputs can be individually isolated or grouped by bridging. Signal return terminals are provided in two groups
of four terminals.
Technical Data
Table A-48. DO820 Digital Output Module Specifications
DO820
Feature
Digital Output Module
Number of channels 8
Maximum field cable length (d.c., a.c.) 600 meters (656 yd.)
WARNING
12V SUPER-
OSP VISION
ERROR 1-8
O 1.1
+5VI
+5V
Process Connector
RESET
MBI-1 CH 1 O 1.2
POWER-OK
ASIC
0V O 2.1
DAT CH 2 O 2.2
DAT-N RS-485
POS0-9 . .
. .
BLOCK .
.
O 8.1
EEPROM CH 8 O 8.2
Process Connections
Table A-49. DO820 Process Connections
Features
• 8 channels for 230V a.c./d.c. relay Normal Closed (NC)
outputs
• 8 isolated channels
F
• Output status indicators R Remove field power
before replacement
• OSP sets outputs to predetermined state upon error detection W
O
• EMC protection
1
• DIN rail mounting
Description 2
Description (continued)
The outputs of the module will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState
command is received. The watchdog timer which is set by the controller and is used for ModuleBus supervision. The
watchdog timer is re-triggered every time the correct node address has been decoded (or broadcast). If the watchdog
timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state and the active outputs (if any)
are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or to use the last good value sent.
The output values will be kept as long as the module stays in the OSP state. To change the outputs the module first has to
leave this state. When reentering Operational State, the outputs are still kept with their OSP value until new valid values
are written.
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
Four different types of MTUs can be used. The TU831 Extended MTU and TU811 Compact MTU enables two wire
connection to the devices without additional terminals. The extended MTU, TU836, provides an individual fuse (3A
max.) per channel on the load outlet terminals. The extended MTU, TU837 provides an individual fuse (3A max.) per
channel. Outputs can be individually isolated or grouped by bridging. Signal return terminals are provided in two groups
of four terminals.
Technical Data
Table A-50. DO821 Digital Output Module Specifications
DO821
Feature
Digital Output Module
Number of channels 8
Maximum field cable length (d.c., a.c.) 600 meters (656 yd.)
ERROR 1-8
O 1.1
+5VI
Process Connector
RESET
+5V O 1.2
MBI-1 CH 1
POWER-OK ASIC
0V O 2.1
DAT CH 2 O 2.2
DAT-N RS-485
POS0-9 . .
. .
BLOCK . .
O 8.1
EEPROM CH 8 O 8.2
Process Connections
Table A-51. DO821 Process Connections
Features
• Two channels
• Interface for RS422, 5V, 12V, 24V and 13 mA transducer F
signal levels R
• Simultaneous pulse count and frequency measurement W
O
• Pulse count (length/position) by accumulation in a
bidirectional 29 bit counter PX1
• Frequency (speed) measurement 0.25 Hz - 1.5 MHz UP1
ST1
• EMC protection
DI1
• DIN rail mounting SY1
Description DO1
TP1
The DP820 module consists of two identical independent
UL1
channels. Each channel can be used for independent pulse
count (length/position) and frequency (speed) PX2
measurement. UP2
ST2
Transducer Connection DI2
Each channel has four inputs (A, B, ST and DI) and one SY2
output (DO). The input signals A and B are used as pulse DO2
inputs. The input signals ST and DI is used for TP2
synchronizing, sampling and gated count purposes.
UL2
The balanced inputs A, B and ST can be connected to pulse
transducers with RS422, 5V, 12V, 24V and 13mA signal
levels if an extended MTU is used (TU830). Adaption to DP820
different signal levels is made by using different terminals
on the MTU (see chapter about process connection).
Only pulse transducers with RS422, 5V and 13mA signal
levels can be used if an compact MTU is used (TU810,
TU812 or TU814).
The unipolar input (DI) is intended for 24V unipolar
signal level.
The DO output is a short circuit proof digital output,
current sourcing type, 24V d.c., 0.5A.
All signals are individually isolated.
All inputs have overvoltage protection. A maximum
voltage of 30V can be connected without any damages.
(continued on next page)
Description (continued)
Shielded twisted pair cables with characteristic impedance=100 (+/- 25%) ohm shall be used for connection of
transducers with RS422/5V/13 mA signals.
The reset circuitry gives a reset signal when the module is inserted until the BLOCK signal is inactive and the POWOK
signal is active. The BLOCK signal is deactivated when the module lock mechanism is in the locked position. The
POWOK comes from the FCI after power is applied.
Input Filter
Each DP820 input has a configurable input filter (see Technical Data). Notice the following restrictions for selection of
filters for inputs A or B:
• The 1us filter shall always be used when 12V and 24V inputs are used.
• Unfiltered inputs can be used if RS422/+5V/13 mA inputs are used, but cables between transducers and the DP820
module must then be separated from other cables to avoid that extra pulses occur due to EMI.
Pulse Encoding
The following different methods for pulse encoding are supported by DP820:
• Input A is used for counting up, input B is used for counting down.
• Input A is used for pulse counting, input B is used to determine count direction.
B=0: down, B=1: up.
• Input A and B is used for a quadrature encoded signals. Multiplication factors
*1, *2 and *4 can be specified. Count direction is determined by A and B phase shift:
Up count ABB: ... 00 10 11 01 00 10 ...
Down count ABB: ... 11 10 00 01 11 10 ...
A
B
PULSE 4 3 2
0 -1 0 1 2 3
COUNT
B
PULSE 4 3 2
0 -1 0 1 2 3
COUNT
B
PULSE 4 3 2 1 0
0 1 2 3
COUNT
UP DOWN
B
PULSE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 5 4 1 -1
0 3 2 0
COUNT
UP DOWN
Figure A-4. Quadrature Mode, #2 (Count on Pos. Edge and Neg. Edge Input A)
B
PULSE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3
0
COUNT
UP DOWN
Figure A-5. Quadrature Mode, #4 (Count on Pos. Edge and Neg. Edge Input A and Input B)
A comparator is used to compare the value of the pulse counter with the content of the compare register. The value of the
compare register is specified by the user (see respective PC Elements Reference Manual, COINCSP). A “coincidence”
occur when a equal condition is detected by the comparator.
The coincidence function can be used to control the digital output signal (DO), as pulse count sample condition, as
synchronization condition and as frequency sample condition (see below).
The pulse counter has overflow detection.
Level sensitive
DI
Counter 0
Value 1 2 3 4 5
Edge sensitive
DI
Counter
Value 0 1 2 3 4 5
Synchronization and sample conditions which uses the DI signal as part of the condition can not be used in gated count
mode.
With the first method is a measurement interval for each channel defined by the user in increments of 1 ms from 1 to
2,000 ms (see respective PC Elements Reference Manual, MEASTIME1 and MEASTIME2). By changing the
measurement interval the user can select a suitable filter time (integration time) with respect to the application’s
requirements.
With the second method is the measure interval controlled by the coincidence function, that is, a measurement interval is
started when a coincidence is detected. Next coincidence terminates the measurement interval, and starts a new
measurement interval.
At the end of each measurement period are the SX and SR registers is updated with the value of the SX and SR counters.
The CPU reads the content in the SX and SR registers and calculates a frequency value.
It is possible to synchronize frequency measurements between the two channels, that is, the measurement period from
one of the channels is then used by both channels.
A frequency sample condition can be specified by the user (see respective PC Elements Reference Manual,
SSAMPCOD). When a sample condition is fulfilled is the value in the SX and SR registers “freezed”. The value in the
SX and SR registers will remain “freezed” until a freeze disable command is received from the controller (that is, when
the sampled frequency value has been read by the PC element). The pulse accumulation in the SX and SR counters
continues during the time when the SX and SR registers is frozen
The reference counter (SR) has a overflow detection function. The SR overflow will be activated if no incoming pulses
has been detected during 4.3 s. When the CPU detects SR overflow, is the frequency value set to zero.
Digital Output
The digital output function can be configured in four different ways:
1. The digital output DO is activated when coincidence occur, and inactivated after a configurable pulse-length
(1ms - 65535 ms) (see respective PC Elements Reference Manual, DOTIME1 and DOTIME2).
2. The digital output DO is activated when DOVALUE (See respective PC Elements Reference Manual, DOVALUE) =1,
and inactivated after a configurable pulse-length (1ms - 65535 ms). The function is retriggable.
3. The digital output DO is activated when DOVALUE=1, and deactivated DOVALUE=0.
4. The digital output DO is activated when coincidence occur and the DOVALUE =1, and inactivated when
DOVALUE=0.
DOVALUE=1
3. DO
DOVALUE=1 DOVALUE=0
4. DO
OSP Function
The digital outputs will be set to a predetermined value if the OSP-watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState
command is received. The watchdog timer is re-triggered every time the correct module address has been decoded (or
broadcast). If the watchdog timer expires or if the SetOSPState command is received, the module enters the OSP state.
The function in OSP state, and when reentering the operational state, will be different depending on how the DO function
is configured (see Digital Output 1 - 4 above):
1. Function in OSP state: No more pulses will be activated as long as the module remains in OSP state. The DO pulse is
always completed if the OSP-state is entered during an active DO pulse (this is, the pulse width is always in accordance
with the DOTIME value).
Function when reentering operational state: The coincidence function has to be enabled before normal DO function will
start.
2. Function in OSP state: Same as in 1. above.
Function when reentering operational state: A new DO-pulse will be started as soon as a modulebus frame with
DOVALUE=1 is received.
3. Function in OSP state: The digital outputs are set to their OSP values which can be configured as a predefined value or
to use last good value sent.
Function when reentering operational state: The outputs keeps the OSP value until a modulebus frame with a new
DOVALUE value is received.
4. Same as 3.
LED Indicators
For description about the LED-indicators with comments see Table A-52
Technical Data
Table A-53. DP820 Digital Pulse Counter Module Specifications
DP820
Feature
Digital Pulse Counter
Number of channels 2
DP820
Feature
Digital Pulse Counter
Input impedance, A, B and ST -inputs
RS422/+5V/13mA - range 100 ohm
12V - range (only TU830) 1 kohm
24V - range (only TU830) 2 kohm
FAULT
RUN
WARNING X2
X1 CHANNEL1 (FPGA)
TP1 L1+
+5VI PULSE COUNT
COUNT CA+_1
RESET
+5V A1
PULSE
MODULEBUS CONNECTOR
PROCESS CONNECTOR
DAT- RS485 (MODULE FREQUENCY CST+_1
BUS COUNT ST1 CST-_1
CLK+ COMM.) SX SX DIR
REGISTER COUNTER VST_11, VST_12
CLK- RS485 DI1 DI_1
POS0-6 SR Fref
SR
REGISTER COUNTER DO1 DO_1
BLOCK
Process Connections
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 Male
Connection Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
+24V d.c. L1+ (2) 1, 14 L1+ (2)
Ch1, CA+ C1 3 C1
Ch1, CA- B1 16 C2
Ch1, VA_1 - - B1
Ch1, VA_2 - - B2
Ch1, Zp A1 - A1, A2
Ch1, CB+ C2 4 C3
Ch1, CB- B2 17 C4
Ch1, VB_1 - - B3
Ch1, VB_2 - - B4
Ch1, Zp A2 - A3, A4
Ch1, CST+ C3 5 C5
Ch1, CST- B3 18 C6
Ch1, VST_1 - - B5
Ch1, VST_2 - - B6
Ch1, Zp A3 - A5, A6
Ch1, DI C4 6 C7
Ch1, DO B4 19 C8
Ch1, L1+ - - B7
Ch1, VST_2 - - B8
Ch1, Zp A4 - A7, A8
Ch2, CA+ C5 7 C9
Ch2, VA_1 - - B9
TU810 TU812
Process TU830
(or TU814) D-Sub 25 Male
Connection Terminal
Terminal Connector (1)
Ch2, CB+ C6 8 C11
Ch2, DI C8 10 C15
Ch2, DO B8 23 C16
Features
• SD811 24V d.c. @ 2.5A
• SD812 24V d.c. @ 5.0A
SD811
• Input 110 - 240V a.c. (45 - 65 Hz), or 185 - 250V d.c.
L1
• Power OK status indicator and output signal X1 L2 (N)
PE
• DIN-rail mounted a.c. 110-240V
104VA
Description DCOK
DC Adj.
The SD811 Power Supply Module provides 24V d.c. at 2.5A
and the SD812 Power Supply Module provides 24V d.c. at +24V
2.5A
5.0A. X2 0V
Technical Data
Table A-55. SD811/SD812 Power Supply Module Specifications
Mains frequency
a.c. 45 - 65 Hz 45 - 65 Hz
d.c. 0 Hz 0 Hz
Rated input power, a.c. 104 VA 207 VA
Power factor 0.67 typical 0.67 typical
Ambient temperature
Transport (max) -25oC to 70oC (-13°F to 158°F) -25oC to 70oC (-13°F to 158°F)
Storage (max) -25oC to 55oC (-13°F to 131°F) -25oC to 55oC (-13°F to 131°F)
Operating (nominal) 5oC to 55oC (41°F to 131°F) 5oC to 55oC (41°F to 131°F)
Relative humidity 10% - 75% 10% - 75%
Approvals Also meeting the requirements for a Also meeting the requirements for a
CE mark based upon the Low CE mark based upon the Low
Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC; Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC;
requirements referring to EN 50178 requirements referring to EN 50178
including EMC capabilities meeting including EMC capabilities meeting
the EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2. the EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2.
Connections
Table A-56. SD811/SD812 Primary Power Connections
Terminal Description
X1 - L1 Mains power Line
Terminal Description
X2 - 1 24V d.c.
X2 - 2 24V d.c.
X2 - 3 0V
X2 - 4 0V
L1
x
L2 (N)
x
PE
BUV48A
x 0V
35V
x +24V
270 ohms
1W
SD811/SD812 DCOK
Features
• Passive unit used for connection and extension of the
ModuleBus ModuleBus
• DIN rail mounting Connector (X1)
Description
The TB805 ModuleBus Cable Adaptor-Out with the TB806
ModuleBus Cable Adaptor-In and ModuleBus Extension
Cables, TK801V0xx, are used to extend the ModuleBus.
Using the TB805 with the TB806, I/O modules on the same
electrical ModuleBus of an I/O cluster, can be mounted on 1
different DIN rails. This makes the installation of I/O 14
Modules more flexible when laying out an enclosure design. DB25 Female
Please refer to Section 2.1.4.1, I/O Station with S800 I/O for Connector (X2)
details on layouts.
The ModuleBus extension cables used with the TB805
comes in 3 standard lengths:
• VTK801V003 - 300 mm 25
13
• TK801V006 - 600 mm
• TK801V012 - 1.2 meters
Overall ModuleBus length must not exceed 2.5 meters
including all cables, MTUs and CI810 or TB820.
The TB805 mounts on the standard DIN rail. It has a
mechanical latch that locks it to the rail. It is grounded to the
DIN-rail through a metallic spring connector. The latch can
be released with a screwdriver.
Technical Data
Table A-58. TB805 ModuleBus Cable Adaptor-Out Specifications
Item Value
Connections 2
DIN41612 Type R/4 (X1)
DB25 Female (X2)
ModuleBus:
Maximum 5V current distribution 1.5A
Maximum 24V current distribution 1.5A
X1 7 X2
POS 0 - 6
ModuleBus Connector DB25 Female
/
ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female
POWOK
DAT, DAT-N 2
/
+24V, 0V24 2
/
+5V 5
/
0V 4
/
CLK+, CLK- 2
/
Shield
EM
Features
• Passive unit used for connection and extension of the
ModuleBus ModuleBus
Connector (X1)
• DIN rail mounting
Description
The TB806 ModuleBus Cable Adaptor-In with the TB805
ModuleBus Cable Adaptor-Out and ModuleBus Extension
Cables, TK801V0xx, are used to extend the ModuleBus.
Using the TB806 with the TB805, I/O modules on the same
electrical ModuleBus of an I/O cluster, can be mounted on DB25 Male 13
different DIN rails. This makes the installation of I/O Connector (X2)
25
Technical Data
Table A-59. TB806 ModuleBus Cable Adaptor-In Specifications
Item Value
Connections 2
DIN41612 Type R/4 (X1)
DB25 Male (X2)
ModuleBus:
Maximum 5V current distribution 1.5A
Maximum 24V current distribution 1.5A
X2 X1
7
POS 0 - 6
/
ModuleBus Connector DB25 Male
POWOK
ModuleBus Connector R/4 Male
DAT, DAT-N 2
/
+24V, 0V24 2
/
+5V 5
/
0V 4
/
CLK+, CLK- 2
/
Shield
EM
Features
ModuleBus
• Passive unit used for termination of the electrical Connector (X1)
ModuleBus
Description
Top View
The TB807 ModuleBus Terminator is used to
terminate the electrical ModuleBus.
Use the TB807 with the CI810 FCI or TB820
ModuleBus Modem to terminate the electrical TB807
ModuleBus of an I/O cluster. The ModuleBus
terminator connects to the outlet ModuleBus
connector of the last MTU. ModuleBus Terminator
Latch
E
F
D
A
C
B
MTU Assembly
E
F
D C A
B
L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+
L1+ B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 L2+
L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2-
Technical Data
Table A-60. TB807 ModuleBus Terminator Specifications
Item Value
Connections 1
DIN41612 Type R/4 (X1)
X1
DAT
ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female
DAT-N
CLK+
CLK-
Features
• 1 fiber optic port for the Optical ModuleBus expansion
• ModuleBus (electrical) connection to the CI810 FCI
Description
The TB810 ModuleBus Optical Port is a communication
interface between the CI810 FCI electrical ModuleBus and
the TB820 ModuleBus Modem of an I/O cluster via the
Optical ModuleBus.
The TB810 can be used in both a simplex optical
configuration as well as in a duplex optical configuration.
In a simplex configuration, the optical Modulebus nodes
are connected in a ring. In a duplex configuration, the
optical Modulebus nodes are connected in a row. Please
refer to Section 3.1.3.2, Optical ModuleBus Connections Tx Rx
Technical Data
Table A-61. TB810 ModuleBus Optical Port Specifications
Item Value
Optical ModuleBus Fiber optic interface, one
transmit and one receive
connection for max. 10 Mbit/s.
Indicators Tx LED: Yellow indicates that
the TB810 is transmitting data
on the optical ModuleBus
Rx LED: Yellow indicates that
the TB810 is receiving data on
the optical ModuleBus
Current consumption +5V 100 mA
Current consumption +24V 20 mA
Power dissipation 0.5 W
Connections
Table A-62. Optical ModuleBus Connections (X2)
Opto connectors type HP Versatile Link can handle both plastic and HCS optic fiber.
Opto Cable
Opto cable according to HP.
• Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) up to 15 meters.
– Extra low loss attenuation
– Simplex or duplex cable
– Latching simplex or duplex connector
• Hard Clad Silica (HCS) fiber up to 200 meters.
– Riser or plenum
– Simplex cable
– Standard simplex connector
X1
E
O
X2
E
O
RX
TX
Features
• 1 fiber optic port for the Optical ModuleBus expansion
• ModuleBus (electrical) connection to the CI810 FCI
Description
The TB811 ModuleBus Optical Port is a communication
interface between the CI810 FCI electrical ModuleBus and
the ABB variable drives ACS 600.
The TB811 has two connectors for fiber optic connections
and a connection to the communication interface module.
The module is equipped with Transmitter/Receiver for up
to 5 Mbit/s. The opto connectors type HP Versatile Link is
used with plastic optic fiber.
Tx Rx
Rx
Tx
Technical Data
Table A-63. TB811 ModuleBus Optical Port Specifications
Item Value
Optical ModuleBus Fiber optic interface, one transmit
and one receive connection for max.
5 Mbit/s.
Connections
Table A-64. Optical ModuleBus Connections (X2)
Opto connectors type HP Versatile Link can be used with plastic optic fiber.
Opto Cable
Opto cable according to HP.
• Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) up to 10 meters.
– Extra low loss attenuation
– Simplex cable
– Latching simplex connector
X1
E
O
X2
E
O
RX
TX
Features
• ModuleBus (electrical) connector to the I/O Modules for
redundant FCIs
• Fiber optic ports to optical ModuleBus
M
O
• Interconnection to the CI820 FCIs D
U
• 2 service ports for the CI820 FCIs L
E
B
• DIN rail mounting U
S
Description
The TB815 Interconnection Unit is a communication
interface between redundant CI820 FCIs and the S800 I/O
modules via the optical and electrical ModuleBus. SERVICE SERVICE
TB815 has two service ports to the CI820 FCIs.
TB815
Tx
Rx
Technical Data
Safety Classification Mechanical Data
Class I according to IEC 536; (earth protected) Width 58 mm (2.3”)
Protection Rating Depth 122 mm (4.8”)
IP20 according to IEC 529, (IEC 144) Height 170 mm (6.7”) including latch
Insulation Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lbs.)
Rated insulation voltage 50V
Dielectric test voltage 500V a.c.
Connections
Table A-65. Service Port (X4, X5) D-sub 9 (female)
4 - -
5 SG Signal Ground
6 - -
9 - -
Features
• 2 fiber optic ports to optical ModuleBus
• ModuleBus (electrical) to the I/O Modules
F R
• Supervisory functions of I/O ModuleBus P
ORx1 ORx2
• Isolated power supply to I/O modules ERx
Description
The TB820 ModuleBus Modem is a communication
interface for connection of S800 I/O modules via the
optical and electrical ModuleBus.
The TB820 can be used in both a simplex optical
configuration as well as in a duplex optical configuration.
In a simplex configuration, the optical Modulebus nodes
CLUSTER
are connected in a ring. In a duplex configuration, the
4 56
optical Modulebus nodes are connected in a row. Please 3 7
2
refer to Section 3.1.3.2, Optical ModuleBus Connections 1
for more information.
TB820
TB820 has two basic parts: Module termination board and
the power supply/communications board (see block
diagram).
L+ L+ SA
The termination board is a unit where most of the L- L- SB
Description (continued)
The power supply board has an isolated power converter that generates a short circuit proof +5V supply for the TB820
and connected I/O modules. This board also contains the Modulebus interfaces, LED indicators and one screwdriver
maneuvered rotary switch for the Modulebus I/O cluster address. The Modulebus I/O cluster address (1-7) is set by a
rotary decimal code switch, any other value than 1-7 is not allowed and will turn the Run LED off.
The Modulebus has an electrical and an optical interface which are logically the same bus. A maximum of twelve I/O
modules can be connected to the electrical Modulebus and up to seven clusters can be connected to the fiber optic
Modulebus expansion. The fiber-optical interface is intended for local distribution of I/O clusters and where more than
12 I/O modules per station are required. Any distribution of I/O modules across the base cluster and the remote cluster(s)
is allowed, however not more than 24 I/O modules per station can be used.
The module is equipped with optical Transmitter/Receiver for up to 10 Mbit/s. Both plastic and HCS (Hard Clad Silica)
optic fiber with connectors (HP Versatile Link ) can be used with TB820.
Technical Data
Table A-66. TB820 ModuleBus Modem Specifications
Item Value
Power input 24V d.c. (19.2 - 30)
Connections
Table A-67. Power Supply Connections
Opto connectors type HP Versatile Link can handle both plastic and HCS optic fiber.
Opto Cable
Opto cable according to HP.
• Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) up to 15 meters.
– Extra low loss attenuation
– Simplex or duplex cable
– Latching simplex or duplex connector
• Hard Clad Silica (HCS) fiber up to 200 meters.
– Riser or plenum
– Simplex cable
– Standard simplex connector
RS-485
RS-485 X3
POWOK
D+,D-
X2 CLK+,CLK-
TB820-1 POS(9:0) Electrical Modulebus
MB +5V Connector
MB+5V
F(ault) 0V
Reset logic,
R(un) MBI-4 +5V Supervision
0V
L-
MB+24V
P(owok) MB +5V MB +5V
DC X1A
SB 3
2
L- 1
POS(9:7) X1B
SA 3
2
L+ 1
E E E E
O O O O TB820-2
X4 X5
Features
• 50 Volt applications - use with AI810, AI820, AI830, AI835,
AO810, AO820, DI810, DI811, DI814, DI830, DI831,
DI885, DO810, DO814, DO815, and DP820 I/O modules
• Compact installation of I/O modules using one-wire
connections
• Up to 16 channels of field signals and process power
connections
• Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules
• Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O
module
• Latching device to DIN rail for grounding
• DIN rail mounting
Description
E
F
The TU810 is a 16 channel 50V compact module D
A
termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The MTU is a
C
B
passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the
I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus.
E
F
D
The TU810 MTU can have up to 16 I/O channels and two A
C
process voltage connections. The maximum rated voltage
B
is 50V and maximum rated current is 2A per channel. Two
mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for
different types of I/O modules.
The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and
to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the
I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the
next MTU.
Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for Row C L1+ C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C8 L2+
MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which
gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The Row A L1- A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8 L2-
configuration can be changed with a screwdriver.
The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a
mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The
latch can be released with a screwdriver.
(continued on next page)
Description (continued)
The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the
signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position.
The process signal terminals are divided into 2 equal and individually isolated groups. Each group consists of 8 I/O
connections, one process voltage connection and 5 common L- connections.
The top part of the MTU can be removed to replace the termination board even with an operational system. Such a need
can be caused by a damaged terminal screw.
Technical Data
Table A-69. TU810 Compact MTU Specifications
Item Value
Process Connections 30
up to 16 I/O channels
2 x 2 Process power terminals
5 x 2 Process power 0V
Rated maximum continuous current per 2A
I/O channel
ModuleBus:
Maximum 5V current distribution 1.5A
Maximum 24V current distribution 1.5A
Connections
2 A1 (L1-) B1 C1
3 2 (L1-) 2 2
4 3 (L1-) 3 3
5 4 (L1-) 4 4
6 5 (L2-) 5 5
7 6 (L2-) 6 6
8 7 (L2-) 7 7
9 A8 (L2-) B8 C8
TU810
C B A
ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male I/O module
UP1 UP1
ZP1 ZP1
EM
I1 I1
1
I2 I2 1
ZP1 1
BLOCK
I3 I3 2
I4 I4 2
ZP1 2
ModuleBus Connector Metral Female
I5 I5 3
I6 I6 3
I16 I 16
8
2
3
3
/
7
/
/
ZP2 8
DAT, DAT-N
+24V, 0V24
POS 0 - 6
UP2 UP2
POWOK
+5V
0V
ZP2 ZP2
Features
• 250 Volt applications - use with DI820, DI821, DO820, and
DO821 I/O modules
• Compact installation of I/O modules
• Up to 8 isolated channels of field signals
• Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules
• Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O
module
• Latching device to DIN rail for grounding
• DIN rail mounting
Description
The TU811 is a 8 channel 250V compact module
termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The MTU is a
passive unit used for connection of the field wiring to the
E
F
I/O modules. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. D
A
C
The TU811 MTU can have up to 8 I/O channels. The
B
maximum rated voltage is 250V and maximum rated
E
current is 3A per channel. Two mechanical keys are used to
F
D
configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. A
C
B
The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and
to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the
I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the
next MTU.
Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for
different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical
configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the
MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which
gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The Row C C 2 4 6 C8
configuration can be changed with a screwdriver.
Row B B1 3 5 7 B
The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a
mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The
latch can be released with a screwdriver. Row A A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A8
Description (continued)
The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the
signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position.
The process signal terminals has 8 individually isolated I/O channels. Each channel has two connections.
The TU811 is primarily intended for modules with individually isolated channels.
The top part of the MTU can be removed to replace the termination board even with an operational system. Such
a need can be caused by a damaged terminal screw.
Technical Data
Table A-71. TU811 Compact MTU Specifications
Item Value
Process connections 16
up to 8 I/O channels
(2 terminals per channel)
Rated maximum continuous current per 3A
I/O channel
ModuleBus:
Maximum 5V current distribution 1.5A
Maximum 24V current distribution 1.5A
Connections
Table A-72. TU811 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1)
2 A1 B1 NC
3 2 NC C2
4 3 3 NC
5 4 NC 4
6 5 5 NC
7 6 NC 6
8 7 7 NC
9 A8 NC C8
10 NC NC NC
(1) All positions marked NC are not mounted in the connector.
TU811
I/O module
C B A
ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male
I 1.1 S1 1
I 1.2 S2 1
I 2.1 S3 2
EM
I 2.2 S4 2
I 3.1 S5 3
BLOCK
I 3.2 S6 3
I 4.2 S8 4
I 5.2 S10 5
I 6.1 S11 6
I 6.2 S12 6
I 7.1 S13 7
I 7.2 S14 7
2
3
3
/
7
/
/
I 8.1 S15 8
I 8.2 S16 8
DAT, DAT-N
+24V, 0V24
POS 0 - 6
POWOK
+5V
0V
EM
ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female
Features
• 50 Volt applications - use with AI810, AI820, AI830, AI835,
AO810, AO820, DI810, DI811, DI814, DI830, DI831 DI885,
DO810, DO814, and DP820 I/O modules
• Compact installation of I/O modules using D-sub connector.
• Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules
• Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O
module
• Latching device to DIN rail for grounding
• DIN rail mounting
Description
The TU812 is a 50V compact module termination unit
(MTU) for the S800 I/O system with 16 signal connections.
The MTU is a passive unit used for connection of the field
E
F
wiring. It also contains a part of the ModuleBus. D
A
The TU812 MTU can have up to 16 I/O signals. The
C
B
maximum rated voltage is 50V and maximum rated current
is 2A per channel. The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to
E
F
the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the D
A
correct address to the I/O module by shifting the outgoing
C
B
position signals to the next MTU.
Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for
different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical
configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the
MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which
gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The
configuration can be changed with a screwdriver.
The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a
mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The
latch can be released with a screwdriver.
(continued next page)
Description (continued)
The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the
signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position.
The process signal connector is a D-Sub 25 pin (male).
The top part of the MTU can be removed to replace the termination board even with an operational system. Such a need
can be caused by a damaged terminal screw.
Technical Data
Table A-73. TU812 Compact MTU Specifications
Item Value
Process connections 25 pin (male) D-Sub connector
up to 16 I/O signals
Connections
Table A-74. TU812 Process Connection D-Sub Connector (X1)
Position Row A
1 UP1
2 ZP1
3 S1
4 S3
5 S5
6 S7
7 S9
8 S11
9 S13
10 S15
11 UP2
12 ZP2
13 EM
14 UP1
15 ZP1
16 S2
17 S4
18 S6
19 S8
20 S10
21 S12
22 S14
23 S16
24 UP2
25 ZP2
TU812
UP1 UP1 1
UP1 14
ZP1 ZP1 2
EM
ZP1 15
Ch1 S1 3
Ch2 S2 16
BLOCK Ch3 S3 4
Ch4 S4 17
Ch6 S6 18
Ch8 S8 19
Ch9 S9 7
Ch10 S10 20
Ch11 S11 8
Ch12 S12 21
Ch13 S13 9
Ch14 S14 22
Ch15 S15 10
Ch16 S16 23
2
3
3
/
7
/
/
/
UP2 UP2 11
UP2 24
DAT, DAT-N
12
+24V, 0V24
ZP2 ZP2
POS 0 - 6
POWOK
ZP2 25
+5V
0V
EM EM 13
ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female
Features
• 50 Volt applications - use with AI810, AI820, AI830, AI835,
AO810, AO820, DI810, DI811, DI814, DI830, DI831,
DI885, DO810, DO814, DO815, and DP820 I/O modules
• Compact installation of I/O modules using one-wire
connections
• Up to 16 channels of field signals and process power
connections with crimped snap-in connectors
• Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules
• Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the wrong I/O
module
• Latching device to DIN rail for grounding
• DIN rail mounting
Description
E
F
The TU814 is a 16 channel 50V compact module D
A
termination unit (MTU) for the S800 I/O. The TU814 has
C
B
three rows of crimp snap-in connectors for field signals and
process power connections. The MTU is a passive unit
E
F
used for connection of the field wiring to the I/O modules. D
A
It also contains a part of the ModuleBus.
C
B
The TU814 MTU can have up to 16 I/O channels and two
process voltage connections. The maximum rated voltage
is 50V and maximum rated current is 2A per channel. Two
mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for
different types of I/O modules.
The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and
to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the
I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the Row C
next MTU.
Row B
Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for
different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical
configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the Row A
MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which
gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The
configuration can be changed with a screwdriver.
Snap-on connector positions
(continued next page)
Description (continued)
The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch
can be released with a screwdriver.
The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the
signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position.
The process signal terminals are divided into 2 equal and individually isolated groups. Each group consists of 8 I/O
connections, 2 process voltage connection and 5 common L- connections.
The top part of the MTU can be removed to replace the termination board even with an operational system. Such a need
can be caused by a damaged terminal screw.
Crimp terminals are provided for connection to field wiring and insertion into the 3 snap-on connectors. Once the
contacts are correctly placed in the connectors, the cable can be easily inserted and removed without future wiring errors.
This assembly function can be performed before the cables are delivered to the site.
Technical Data
Table A-75. TU814 Compact MTU Specifications
Item Value
Process connections 30
up to 16 I/O channels
2 x 2 process power terminals
2 x 5 process power 0V
ModuleBus:
Maximum 5V current distribution: 1.5A
Maximum 24V current distribution: 1.5A
Connections
Table A-76. TU814 Process Connection Crimp Connector (X1)
2 A1 (L1-) B1 C1
3 2 (L1-) 2 2
4 3 (L1-) 3 3
5 4 (L1-) 4 4
6 5 (L2-) 5 5
7 6 (L2-) 6 6
8 7 (L2-) 7 7
9 A8 (L2-) B8 C8
D A
C
B
Cabling to
field devices
TU814
C B A
ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male I/O module
UP1 UP1
ZP1 ZP1
EM
I1 I1
1
I2 I2 1
ZP1 1
BLOCK
I3 I3 2
I4 I4 2
ZP1 2
ModuleBus Connector Metral Female
I5 I5 3
I6 I6 3
I 16 I 16
8
2
3
3
/
7
/
/
ZP2 8
DAT, DAT-N
+24V, 0V24
POS 0 - 6
UP2 UP2
POWOK
+5V
0V
ZP2 ZP2
Features
Row A
Row B
Row C
• 50 Volt applications - use with AI810,
AI820, AI830, AI835, AO810, AO820,
DI810, DI811, DI814, DI830, DI831,
DI885, DO810, DO814, DO815, and DP820
I/O modules
L1+ L1+
• Complete installation of I/O modules using
L1- L1- A1
3-wire connections, fuses and field power
distribution
C1
• Up to 16 channels of field signals and
2
2
process power connections
3
3
• Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules
4
4
4
• Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the
5
5
5
wrong I/O module
6
6
6
• Latching device to DIN rail for grounding
7
7
7
• DIN rail mounting 8
8
8
9
Description
9
9
10
10
10
E
F
The TU830 is a 16 channel 50V extended
11
11
D
11
C
12
12
B
13
13
E
14
F
14
14
D
ModuleBus. A
15
15
15 C16 19
C
B
16 L2+ L2+
Description (continued)
The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to the I/O module and to the next MTU. It also generates the correct address to the
I/O module by shifting the outgoing position signals to the next MTU.
The MTU can be mounted on a standard DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch
can be released with a screwdriver.
Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical
configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which
gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver.
The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the
signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position.
The process signal terminals are divided into 2 equal and individually isolated groups. Each group consists of 8 I/O
channels, process voltage connection and a 6.3A fuse (as delivered). Each I/O channel has two I/O connections and one
ZP connection. For input modules, field power is provided by the C-row.
Technical Data
Table A-77. TU830 Extended MTU Specifications
Item Value
Process Connections 56
up to 16 I/O channels
4 Process terminals 6.3A
10 x 2 Process power 0V
ModuleBus:
Maximum 5V current distribution 1.5A
Maximum 24V current distribution 1.5A
Connections
Table A-78. TU830 Process Connection Screw Terminals (X1)
2 L1- L1+ NC
3 A1 B1 C1
4 2 2 2
5 3 3 3
6 4 4 4
7 5 5 5
8 6 6 6
9 7 7 7
10 8 8 8
11 9 9 9
12 10 10 10
13 11 11 11
14 12 12 12
15 13 13 13
16 14 14 14
17 15 15 15
19 L2- L2+ NC
20 L2- L2+ NC
(1) All positions marked NC are not mounted in the connector.
TU830 C B A
ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male I/O module 6.3A
UP1 UP1
UP1
ZP1 ZP1
ZP1
I1 I1 1
EM
U1 U1 1
ZP1 1
I2 I2 2
U2 U2 2
BLOCK
ZP1 2
I3 I3 3
U3 U3
3
ZP1 3
ModuleBus Connector Metral Female
I4 I4 4
U4 U4 4
I9 I9 9
U9 U9 9
ZP2 9
. .
.
2
3
3
. .
/
7
.
/
/
/
I16 I16 16
U16 U16 16
ZP2 16
DAT, DAT-N
+24V, 0V24
POS 0 - 6
POWOK
UP2
UP2 6.3A UP2
+5V
0V
ZP2
ZP2 ZP2
ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female EM
Features
• 250 Volt applications - use with DI820
Row A
DI821, DO820, and DO821 I/O modules
Row B
• Greater connection area for larger wires
• Up to 8 isolated channels of field signals
• Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules
• Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the
wrong I/O module
• Latching device to DIN rail for grounding
• DIN rail mounting
B1 2
A1 2
Description
The TU831 is a 8 channel 250V extended
module termination unit (MTU) for the
3
3
S800 I/O. The MTU is a passive unit used
4
for connection of the field wiring to the
4
E
F
channels. The maximum rated voltage is
7
D
A
7
C
per channel. Two mechanical keys are
B8
B
A8
E
F
types of I/O modules. D
A
The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to
C
B
the I/O module and to the next MTU. It
also generates the correct address to the
I/O module by shifting the outgoing
position signals to the next MTU.
The MTU can be mounted on a standard
DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that
locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch
can be released with a screwdriver.
(continued next page)
Description (continued)
Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical
configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which
gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver.
The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the
signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position.
The process signal terminals has 8 individually isolated I/O channels. Each channel has two connections.
Technical Data
Table A-79. TU831 Compact MTU Specifications
Item Value
Process connections 16
up to 8 I/O channels
(2 terminals per channel)
Rated maximum continuous current per 3A
I/O channel
ModuleBus:
Maximum 5V current distribution 1.5A
Maximum 24V current distribution 1.5A
Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 6mm2
Stranded: 0.2 - 4 mm2, 24 - 10 AWG
Rekommended torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm
Connections
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 A8 B8
TU831
B A
ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male I/O module
O 1.1 S1 1
O 1.2 S2 1
O 2.1 S3 2
EM
O 2.2 S4 2
O 3.1 S5 3
BLOCK
O 3.2 S6 3
O 6.1 S11 6
O 6.2 S12 6
O 7.1 S13 7
O 7.2 S14 7
2
3
3
/
7
O 8.1 S15 8
/
/
/
O 8.2 S16 8
DAT, DAT-N
+24V, 0V24
POS 0 - 6
POWOK
+5V
0V
EM
ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female
Features
• 50 Volt applications - use with the AI810
Row A
module
Row B
• Up to 8 channels of field signals and process
power connections
• Each channel has one fused transducer
power terminal and one signal connection
• Process voltage can be connected to 2
individually isolated groups
• Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules X11
L1+ L1+
• Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the
L1- L1-
wrong I/O module
11 12 21 22
• Latching device to DIN rail for grounding
• DIN rail mounting
31 32 41 42
Description
The TU835 is a 8 channel 50V extended
51 52 61 62
E
F
for connection of the field wiring to the D
I/O modules. It also contains a part of the A
71 72
C
ModuleBus. X12
B
81 82
E
F
L2+ L2+
C
B
channel. Two mechanical keys are used to
configure the MTU for different types of X13
I/O modules.
The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to
the I/O module and to the next MTU. It
also generates the correct address to the
I/O module by shifting the outgoing
position signals to the next MTU.
The MTU can be mounted on a standard
DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that
locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch
can be released with a screwdriver.
(continued next page)
Description (continued)
Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical
configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which
gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver.
The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the
signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position.
The process signal terminals has 8 individually isolated I/O channels. Each channel has two connections: one fused
transducer power terminal and one signal connection. Process voltage can be connected to two individually isolated
groups.
Technical Data
Table A-81. TU835 Compact MTU Specifications
Item Value
Process connections 16
up to 8 I/O channels
(2 terminals per channel)
ModuleBus:
Maximum 5V current distribution 1.5A
Maximum 24V current distribution 1.5A
Connections
Table A-82. Process Power Source Connections (X11, X13)
Position Row A
1 11 (F1, L1+ power)
2 12 (signal)
4 22 (signal)
6 32 (signal)
8 42 (signal)
10 52 (signal)
12 62 (signal)
14 72 (signal)
16 82 (signal)
TU835
EM
X12
A
F1 U1 11 1
S1 12 2
BLOCK
F2 U2 21 3
S2 22 4
F3
ModuleBus Connector Metral Female
U3 31 5
S3 32 6
X13
2
2
3
B A
/
7
/
/
/
UP2 L2+ 1
L2+ 2
DAT, DAT-N
1
+24V, 0V24
ZP2 L2-
POS 0 - 6
POWOK
L2- 2
+5V
0V
Features
• 250 Volt applications - use with the DO820,
Row A
and DO821 module
Row B
• Two groups with 4 channels of field signals
and process power connections
• Each channel has one fused load power
terminal and one signal return connection
• Process voltage can be connected to 2
individually isolated groups X11
• Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules
L1 L1
N1 N1
• Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the
wrong I/O module
11 12
• Latching device to DIN rail for grounding
21 22
Description
41 42
E
F
for connection of the field wiring to the D
I/O modules. It also contains a part of the A
71 72
C
ModuleBus. X12
B
81 82
E
F
channels. The maximum rated voltage is D
L2 L2
A
250V and maximum rated current is 3A
N2 N2
C
B
per channel. Two mechanical keys are
used to configure the MTU for different
X13
types of I/O modules.
The MTU distributes the ModuleBus to
the I/O module and to the next MTU. It
also generates the correct address to the
I/O module by shifting the outgoing
position signals to the next MTU.
The MTU can be mounted on a standard
DIN rail. It has a mechanical latch that
locks the MTU to the DIN rail. The latch
can be released with a screwdriver.
(continued next page)
Description (continued)
Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical
configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which
gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver.
The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the
signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position.
The process signal terminals are divided into 2 equal and individually isolated groups. Each groups consists of 4 I/O
connections and process voltage connection. Each channel has two connections: one fused load outlet terminal and one
signal return connection.
Technical Data
Table A-84. TU836 Extended MTU Specifications
Item Value
Process connections 16
up to 8 I/O channels
(2 terminals per channel)
Rated maximum continuous current per 10A
process voltage connection (L1, L2, N1, N2)
Rated maximum continuous current per I/O 3A
channel
ModuleBus:
Maximum 5V current distribution 1.5A
Maximum 24V current distribution 1.5A
Fuse (8) 3.15A (fast glass tube, 5x20 mm)
Acceptable wire sizes Solid: 0.2 - 4 mm2
Stranded: 0.2 - 2.5 mm2, 24 - 12 AWG
Rekommended torque 0.5 - 0.6 Nm
Connections
Table A-85. Process Power Source Connections (X11, X13)
X11 - 2 N1 L1
X13 - 1 N2 L2
X13 - 2 N2 L2
Position Row A
1 11 (F1, L1 power)
2 12 (signal return)
3 21 (F2, L1 power)
4 22 (signal return)
5 31 (F3, L1 power)
6 32 (signal return)
7 41 (F4, L1 power)
8 42 (signal return)
9 51 (F5, L2 power)
10 52 (signal return)
11 61 (F6, L2 power)
12 62 (signal return)
13 71 (F7, L2 power)
14 72 (signal return)
15 81 (F8, L2 power)
16 82 (signal return)
TU836 X11
ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male I/O module B A
UP1 L1 1
L1 2
ZP1 N1 1
N1 2
EM
X12
A
S1 F1 S11 11 1
12 2
BLOCK
F2
S2 S21 21 3
22 4
ModuleBus Connector Metral Female
S3 F3 S31 31 5
32 6
S6 F6 S61 61 11
62 12
S7 F7 S71 71 13
72 14
F8
S8 S81 81 15
82 16
2
3
3
/
7
/
/
X13
B A
DAT, DAT-N
+24V, 0V24
UP2 1
POS 0 - 6
L2
POWOK
L2 2
+5V
0V
ZP2 N2 1
N2 2
ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female EM
Features
• 250 Volt applications - use with the DO820,
Row A
Row B
and DO821 module Fuse
Holders
• Up to 8 individually isolated channels of
field signals and process power connections
• Each channel two terminals and one fuse
X11
• Allows a mix of isolated and grouped
N1 11 12
channels
N1 13 14
• Process voltage return can be connected to 2
individually isolated groups
B1
• Connections to ModuleBus and I/O modules
A1
• Mechanical keying prevents insertion of the
2
wrong I/O module 2
3
• Latching device to DIN rail for grounding
3
Description
4
E
5
F
S800 I/O. The MTU is a passive unit used D
A
6
C
X12
B
6
ModuleBus.
E
F
7
D
The TU837 MTU can have up to 8 I/O A
B8
C
channels. The maximum rated voltage is
B
A8
Description (continued)
Two mechanical keys are used to configure the MTU for different types of I/O modules. This is only a mechanical
configuration and it does not affect the functionality of the MTU or the I/O module. Each key has six positions, which
gives a total number of 36 different configurations. The configuration can be changed with a screwdriver.
The MTU has a mechanical locking mechanism that locks the module in its position. This mechanism also gives the
signal BLOCK to the I/O module that keeps the module in its init state until it is locked in its position.
The process signal terminals has 8 individually isolated I/O channels. Each channel has two connections: one fused load
outlet terminal and one process voltage connection. There are 2 individually isolated groups for signal return
connections.
Technical Data
Table A-87. TU837 Extended MTU Specifications
Item Value
Process connections 28
up to 8 I/O channels
(2 terminals per channel)
2 x 6 power common terminals
Rated maximum continuous current per 10A
signal return connection (N1, N2)
ModuleBus:
Maximum 5V current distribution: 1.5A
Maximum 24V current distribution: 1.5A
Connections
Table A-88. Process Power Connection X11
Row A Row B
2 ZP1 13 ZP1 11
3 ZP1 14 ZP1 12
Row A Row B
Terminal Signal Marking Signal Marking
1 ZP2 27 ZP2 25
2 ZP2 28 ZP2 26
3 ZP2 N2 ZP2 N2
Row A Row B
Terminal Signal Marking Signal Marking
1 S21 (F1) A1 S1 B1
2 S41 (F2) 2 S3 2
3 S61 (F3) 3 S5 3
4 S81 (F4) 4 S7 4
5 S101 (F5) 5 S9 5
X11
B A
TU837
ZP1 N1 1
I/O module N1 1
ModuleBus Connector C/4 Male
X12
B A
S1 B1 1
S2 F1 S21 A1 1
11 2
EM
S3 2 2
S4 F2 S41 2 2
12 3
BLOCK
S5 3 3
F3
ModuleBus Connector Metral Female
S6 S61 3 3
13 2
Module Process Connector
S7 4 4
S8 F4 S81 4 4
14 3
S9 5 5
S10 F5 S101 5 5
25 1
S11 6 6
S12
F6 S121 6 6
26 2
S13 7 7
S14 F7 S141 7 7
2
3
7
/
/
/
27 1
S15 B8 8
DAT, DAT-N
+24V, 0V24
POS 0 - 6
S16 F8 S161 A8 8
POWOK
28 2
+5V
0V
EM ZP2 N2 3
ModuleBus Connector R/4 Female
N2 3
B A
X13
INDEX
A D
A.C. supply 2-18 D.C. supply 2-18
Address jumpering 2-84 Data scanning principles 3-33, 4-3, 4-5
Advant Fieldbus 100 1-12, 2-83, 4-1 DI810 1-9, 1-33, 2-36 to 2-37, 5-16, A-55
AI810 1-8, 1-32, 2-20, 5-16, A-1 DI811 1-9, 1-33, 2-39, 5-16, A-59
AI820 1-8, 1-32, 2-24, 5-16, A-7 DI814 1-9, 1-33, 2-41, 2-43, 5-16, A-63
AI830 1-8, 1-32, 2-26, 5-16, A-13 DI820 1-9, 1-33, 2-44 to 2-45, 5-16, A-67
AI835 1-8, 1-32, 2-28, 5-16, A-19 DI821 1-9, 1-34, 2-46, 5-16, A-71
Analog input module DI830 1-9, 2-48 to 2-50, 5-16, A-75
AI810 A-1 Digital input module, SOE A-76
AI820 A-7 DI831 1-9, 2-51 to 2-53, 5-16, A-81
AI830 A-13 Digital input module, SOE A-82
AI835 A-19 DI885 1-9, 1-34, 2-54 to 2-55, 5-16, A-87
Analog output module Digital input module, SOE A-88
AO810 A-25 Digital input module
AO820 A-31 DI810 A-55
AO810 1-9, 1-33, 2-31, 2-33, 5-16, A-25 DI811 A-59
AO820 1-9, 1-33, 2-34 to 2-35, 5-16, A-31 DI814 A-63
DI820 A-67
C DI821 A-71
Cable adaptor 1-9 DI830 A-75
Cable considerations 2-16 DI831 A-81
Channel Status 4-9 DI885 A-87
Check of non-redundant power supply 5-14 Digital output module
Check of redundant power supply 5-14 DO810 A-93
CI810/CI810A 1-9, 1-12, 5-3, 5-21, A-37 DO814 A-97
CI820 1-9, 1-14, 5-5, 5-21, A-43 DO815 A-103
CI830 1-9, 1-16, 2-83, 5-7, 5-21, 5-28, A-49 DO820 A-109
Compact MTU 1-24 to 1-26, A-155, A-159, A-163, A-167 DO821 A-115
Connection principles 2-19 DIN-rail 2-3
Connections Dissipation permitted in cabinets 3-27
AF 100 Fieldbus 3-9 Distributed MTUs 2-83
Power supply 3-15 DO810 1-9, 1-34, 2-56 to 2-58, 5-16, A-93
Process 2-19 DO814 1-9, 1-35, 2-59 to 2-61, 5-16, A-97
Profibus-DP 3-14 DO815 1-9, 1-35, 2-62 to 2-63, 5-16, A-103
Cooling load 3-35 DO820 1-9, 1-35, 2-64 to 2-67, 5-17, A-109
Current consumption 2-18 DO821 1-9, 1-35, 2-68 to 2-70, 5-17, A-115
DP820 1-9, 1-35, 2-72 to 2-75, 5-17, A-121
E
Enclosure layouts 1-39
Environmental considerations 2-2
Error state 4-8, 4-12
Extended MTU 1-24, 1-26 to 1-28, A-171, A-175, A-179,
A-183, A-187
Extension cables 1-11
F L
FCI 1-7, 1-12, 1-14, 1-16, 4-1, 4-3, 5-21, A-37, A-43, A-49 LED
CI810 3-6 Location 5-3
CI810A 3-6 LEDs 5-2
CI820 3-6 FCI 5-3, 5-5, 5-7
CI830 3-6 I/O module 5-10
FCI and I/O module replacement 5-15 Lightning strike protection 2-76
FCI functionality
Advant Fieldbus 100 4-1 M
Profibus-DP 4-3 Maintenance 5-1
FCI module 1-13, 1-15, 1-17 Maximum ambient temperature 3-35
Fieldbus communications interface A-37, A-43, A-49 Module status 4-9
Fieldbus connection 2-83 Module termination units 1-24
Fusing 2-19 ModuleBus 2-6
ModuleBus extension 1-10
G ModuleBus extension cable 2-8
General specifications A-1 ModuleBus modem 5-22, A-149
Ground contact 2-4 ModuleBus optical port 2-9
Grounding 2-15, 2-79 TB810 2-9
Process signals 2-80 ModuleBus terminator 2-13
Protective ground 2-15 Mounting 1-29
Signals and voltage supply 2-16 MTU
TU810 A-155
H TU811 A-159
Hardware configuration 3-1 TU812 A-163
Hazardous applications 2-76 TU814 A-167
Heat dissipation 3-27 TU830 A-171
High voltage switch-gear applications 2-76 TU831 A-175
TU835 A-179
I TU836 A-183
I/O clusters (1-7) 2-83 TU837 A-187
I/O module functionality MTUs 5-17
Advant Fieldbus 100 4-5
Profibus-DP 4-9 N
I/O module installation 2-12 Not configured state 4-7, 4-11
I/O modules 1-32
I/O Station O
Assembly 2-82 Operational state 4-7, 4-11
I/O station 1-8, 1-11, 2-3 Optical ModuleBus expansion 2-9
Incremental pulse counter A-121 OSP 1-35, 4-8, 4-13
Industrial environments 2-16 OSP state 4-7, 4-11
Init state 4-6, 4-10
Installation
Checklists 2-84
Profibus-DP 2-1
Interconnection unit
TB815 A-147
P R
Parameters RE810 1-10, 1-39
Loading 4-8, 4-12 Enclosures layouts 1-39
Loading invalid 4-8, 4-12 Ready state 4-7, 4-11
Non-volatile 4-8, 4-12 Redundant FCI installation 2-6
Personnel safety 2-79 Repair 5-12
Power RTD input module
A.C. supply 2-18 AI830 A-13
D.C. supply 2-18
Requirements 2-18 S
Power and cooling 3-35 S800 I/O
Power consumption 3-35 Assembly 2-82
Power supply 1-36, 3-22 Installation 2-1
Load calculation 3-26 Safety regulations 2-79, 5-1
Power supply module A-133 SD811 1-10, 1-36, 3-22, A-133
Power watts 3-35 SD812 1-10, 1-36, 3-22, A-133
Procedure Sequence of event A-75, A-81, A-87
Power up 2-92 Shut down
Process connections 2-19 Emergency 2-90
AI810 2-20, A-5 Manual stop 2-91
AI820 2-24, A-11 Safety 2-90
AI830 2-26, A-17 Site planning environment 2-1
AI835 2-28, A-23 SOE A-75, A-81, A-87
AO810 2-31, A-29 Specifications A-1
AO820 2-34, A-35 Start-up 2-84
DI810 2-36, A-58 State
DI811 2-39, A-62 Error 4-8, 4-12
DI814 2-41, A-66 Init 4-6, 4-10
DI820 2-44, A-70 Not configured 4-7, 4-11
DI821 2-46, A-74 Operational 4-7, 4-11
DI830 2-48, A-79 OSP (Outputs Set as Predefined) 4-7, 4-11
DI831 2-51, A-85 Ready 4-7, 4-11
DI885 2-54, A-92 Station address selector
DO810 2-56, A-96 Advant Fieldbus 100 3-6 to 3-7
DO814 2-59, A-101 Profibus-DP 3-8
DO815 2-62, A-107 Status
DO820 2-64, A-113 Channel (Data quality) 4-9, 4-13
DO821 2-68, A-119 Module 4-9, 4-13
DP820 2-72, A-130
Process signals 2-83
Profibus-DP 1-3, 1-8 to 1-9, 1-16, 2-83, 3-32, 4-3, A-49
I/O module functionality 4-9
Module identity 4-9
Module states 4-10
Module status 4-13
Protective ground 2-18
Pulse counter
DP820 A-121
T
TB805 1-9, A-137
TB806 1-9, A-139
TB807 1-9, 2-13, A-141
TB810 1-9, 2-9, A-143
TB810/811 5-22
TB811 1-10, A-145
TB815 1-10, 5-22, A-44, A-147
TB820 1-10, 5-22, A-149
TC501V150 1-10
TC505 1-10
Temperature 2-2, 3-35
Cabinetry factors 2-2
I/O module factors 2-2
Terminator 1-10
Thermocouple/mV input module
AI835 A-19
TK801V003 1-10
TK801V006 1-10
TK801V012 1-10
TK811V015 1-10
TK811V050 1-10
TK811V150 1-10
TU810 1-10, 1-24 to 1-25, 2-21, 2-25, 2-27, 2-29, 2-32,
2-35, 2-37, 2-40, 2-42, 2-49, 2-52, 2-55, 2-57, 2-60, 2-63,
2-72, 5-17, A-155
TU811 1-10, 1-24, 1-26, 2-45, 2-47, 2-65, 2-69, 5-17, A-159
TU812 1-24, 1-26, 2-23, 2-33, 2-38, 2-43, 2-50, 2-53, 2-58,
2-61, 2-73, 5-17, A-163
TU814 1-10, 1-24, 1-26, 2-21, 2-25, 2-27, 2-29, 2-32, 2-35,
2-37, 2-40, 2-42, 2-49, 2-52, 2-55, 2-57, 2-60, 2-63, 2-72,
5-17, A-167
TU830 1-10, 1-24, 1-26, 2-20, 2-24, 2-26, 2-28, 2-31, 2-34,
2-36, 2-39, 2-41, 2-48, 2-51, 2-54, 2-56, 2-59, 2-62, 2-74
to 2-75, 5-17, A-171
TU831 1-10, 1-24, 1-27, 2-44, 2-46, 2-64, 2-68, 5-17, A-175
TU835 1-10, 1-24, 1-27, 2-22, 5-17, A-179
TU836 1-10, 1-24, 1-28, 2-66, 2-70, 5-17, A-183
TU837 1-10, 1-24, 1-28, 2-67, 2-71, A-187
U
User repair 5-12
V
Ventilation 3-27
Vibration 2-2
Voltage distribution 2-19